0% found this document useful (0 votes)

145 views492 pages

LT Series HMI Studio User Manual

Uploaded by

Ivan Moreno

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

145 views492 pages

LT Series HMI Studio User Manual

Uploaded by

Ivan Moreno

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 492

LT Studio User Manual

Content
1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 1
2 Quick start .............................................................................................................................. 1
2.1 Electrical connection of the screen ............................................................................. 1
2.1.1 Connect to the power supply ........................................................................... 1
2.1.2 Connect to the computer ................................................................................. 1
2.1.3 Serial port connection ...................................................................................... 1
2.1.4 USB Host connection ........................................................................................ 2
2.1.5 Network port using........................................................................................... 2
2.2 Software downloading and installing .......................................................................... 2
2.2.1 Software downloading ..................................................................................... 2
2.2.2 Software installing ............................................................................................ 2
2.2.3 Installation is completed. ................................................................................. 3
2.3 First use ....................................................................................................................... 4
2.4 Project download and upload ..................................................................................... 8
2.4.1 Project downloading ........................................................................................ 8
2.4.2 Project downloading from USB disk ............................................................... 10
2.4.3 Project uploading ........................................................................................... 14
2.4.4 Project uploading to USB disk. ....................................................................... 17
2.4.5 Project decompiling........................................................................................ 17
3 Description for communication connection ......................................................................... 19
LEADSHINE .......................................................................................................................................... 19
DELTA................................................................................................................................................... 19
FATEK................................................................................................................................................... 20
Flexem ............................................................................................................................. 21
1 flexem_fl2n_mistubishi_fx2n_compatable.......................................................... 21
2 flexem_fl2n_modbus ........................................................................................... 22
3 Differences between Flexem FL2N(Mistubishi FX2N Compatable) and Flexem
FL2N(Modbus) ................................................................................................................. 22
HCFA ............................................................................................................................................ 23
Hitachi ............................................................................................................................. 25
HollySys ........................................................................................................................... 26
Inovance .......................................................................................................................... 27
Kewei ............................................................................................................................... 28
KEYENCE .......................................................................................................................... 29
Kinco................................................................................................................................ 29
LS ..................................................................................................................................... 30
1 ls_mster_cpu_serial ............................................................................................. 30
2 ls_xgt_cpu_serial .................................................................................................. 31
MEGMEET ....................................................................................................................... 32
MIKOM ..................................................................................................................................33
Mitsubishi ........................................................................................................................ 34
1 Mitsubishi_FX0S_FX0N_FX1S_FX1N_FX2............................................................. 34
2 Mitsubishi FX2N ................................................................................................... 35
LT Studio User Manual
3 Mitsubishi FX3U_FX3G ......................................................................................... 36
4 Mitsubishi Melsec Q ............................................................................................. 37
5 Mitsubishi_FX3U_ENET_L .................................................................................... 38
6 Mitsubishi_melsec_ethernet ............................................................................... 39
Modbus ........................................................................................................................... 40
1 Modbus_RTU........................................................................................................ 41
2 Modbus_ RTU _Extend ......................................................................................... 41
3 Differences between Modbus_RTU and Modbus_RTU_Extend .......................... 42
4 Modbus_ TCP............................................................................................................. 42
5 Modbus_ UDP ...................................................................................................... 43
Modbus RTU Server - Serial port service......................................................................... 44
Modbus TCP Server– Ethernet service ............................................................................ 45
OMRON ........................................................................................................................... 46
Panasonic ........................................................................................................................ 47
Siemens ........................................................................................................................... 49
1 Siemens S7_200 ................................................................................................... 49
2 Siemens S7_200 Network..................................................................................... 50
3 Siemens S7_200 Network Module ....................................................................... 51
4 Siemens S7_300 MPI ............................................................................................ 52
5 Siemens S7_300_network .................................................................................... 53
6 Siemens S7_1200_network .................................................................................. 54
THINGET .......................................................................................................................... 56
TRIO ................................................................................................................................. 56
1 TRIO _modbus ...................................................................................................... 56
2 TRIO _modbus_extend ......................................................................................... 57
3 Differences between TRIO _modbus and TRIO _modbus_extend ....................... 58
Yaskawa ........................................................................................................................................58
1 Yaskawa ............................................................................................................................58
2 Yaskawa network device....................................................................................... 58
Yokogawa .....................................................................................................................................59
4 Detailed manual ................................................................................................................... 61
4.1 File ............................................................................................................................. 61
4.2 View........................................................................................................................... 62
4.3 Edit ............................................................................................................................ 64
4.4 Window ..................................................................................................................... 66
4.5 Drawing ..................................................................................................................... 70
4.5.1 Straight Line ................................................................................................... 70
4.5.2 Fold Line ......................................................................................................... 71
4.5.3 Rectangle ........................................................................................................ 72
4.5.4 Polygon ........................................................................................................... 73
4.5.5 Ellipse ............................................................................................................. 76
4.5.6 Arc .................................................................................................................. 79
4.5.7 Sector ............................................................................................................. 80
4.5.8 Sector Ring ..................................................................................................... 81
LT Studio User Manual
4.5.9 Static Picture .................................................................................................. 82
4.5.10 Static Text..................................................................................................................... 88
4.6 Component ............................................................................................................... 94
4.6.1 Switch ............................................................................................................. 94
4.6.2 Indicator Light .............................................................................................. 114
4.6.3 Numeric Value and Character Display .......................................................... 121
4.6.4 Toggle Switch and menu ............................................................................... 143
4.6.5 Timer and Data Transmission ...........................................................................166
4.6.6 Barand Meter ............................................................................................... 176
4.6.7 Curve Graphs ................................................................................................. 188
4.6.8 Scale ............................................................................................................. 208
4.6.9 Table........................................................................................................................ 215
4.6.10 Slider .......................................................................................................... 221
4.6.11 Moving Component ................................................................................... 224
4.6.12 Window ...................................................................................................... 226
4.6.13 List .............................................................................................................. 234
4.6.14 Tools...................................................................................................................... 257
4.6.15 Pipeline....................................................................................................... 262
4.7Library ...................................................................................................................... 266
4.7.1 GraphicsLibrary ............................................................................................. 266
4.7.2 Text Library .................................................................................................... 271
4.7.3 Address Tag Library ....................................................................................... 275
4.7.4 Audio Library ...................................................................................... 277
4.8Macro ....................................................................................................................... 285
4.8.1 Create Macro ................................................................................................ 285
4.8.2 Edit Macro ..................................................................................................... 286
4.8.3 Enable Password Verification ...........................................................................287
4.8.4 Update Macro Password .............................................................................. 288
4.9 Recipe ...................................................................................................................... 290
4.9.1 General .......................................................................................................... 290
4.9.2 Data Information .......................................................................................... 294
4.10 Setup ..................................................................................................................... 297
4.10.1 HMI settings ............................................................................................... 297
4.10.2 System Settings .......................................................................................... 300
4.10.3 Communication Settings ............................................................................. 346
4.10.4 Options ....................................................................................................... 364
4.11 Tools .................................................................................................................................. 367
4.12 Help ....................................................................................................................... 370
4.13 General functions .................................................................................................. 371
4.13.1 Address editor ............................................................................................ 371
4.13.2 Drawing ...................................................................................................... 380
4.13.3 Font settings................................................................................................ 382
4.13.4 Graphic edit ................................................................................................ 384
4.13.5 Control settings .......................................................................................... 388
LT Studio User Manual
4.13.6 Display ........................................................................................................ 395
4.13.7 Keyboard setting ........................................................................................ 398
4.13.8 Label ........................................................................................................... 401
4.13.9 Marquee ..................................................................................................... 404
4.13.10 Logic Control ............................................................................................ 406
4.13.11 Shadow Effect ...............................................................................................411
4.13.12 Position..................................................................................................... 412
4.13.13 Rotation .........................................................................................................414
4.13.14 Dynamic Graphics..................................................................................... 415
4.13.15 Table Drawing ........................................................................................... 416
4.13.16 Export CSV ................................................................................................ 418
5 Use topic............................................................................................................................. 420
5.1 Find and Replace ..................................................................................................... 420
5.2 Outline..................................................................................................................... 421
5.4 Macro ...................................................................................................................... 424
5.4.1 Macro Editor Introduction ............................................................................ 424
5.4.2 A Macro example ..............................................................................................428
5.5 Online software upgrade ........................................................................................ 435
6 Appendix ............................................................................................................................ 436
6.1 The Use of Register .................................................................................................. 436
6.1.1 Word Register ............................................................................................... 436
6.1.2 Bit Register ................................................................................................... 437
6.2 Built-in Functions .................................................................................................... 438
6.2.1 Read Write Function ..................................................................................... 438
6.2.2 System Functions.......................................................................................... 445
6.2.3 Computation and Conversion Function ........................................................ 450
6.2.4 Operator ............................................................................................................450
6.3 System Register Bits and Words List ........................................................................ 451
LT Studio User Manual
1 Introduction
The software “LT Studio” you are using is a new configuration software product developed
by our R&D team for Leadshine HMI. It was produced with more than ten years of technical
experience and accumulation based on sufficient practices on Human Machine Interface product
development and field actualization. We believe you will feel our specialization and concentration
when you use this software. Thank you!

2 Quick start

2.1 Electrical connection of the screen

2.1.1 Connect to the power supply

The rated voltage of the screen is DC18~28V, and DC24V power supply is recommended. The
interface is at the back, as shown in Fig. 1, the “24V+” is connected to “DC24V”, the “24V-“ (or
"0V") is connected to “GND”. If the field is involved with a high interference, a highly reliable earth
must be connected to the “FG” port. (Note: FG- Frame Ground, the reference grounding for the
metal shell frame and the DC end.)

Fig. 1

2.1.2 Connect to the computer

The screen can be connected to the computer only via a USB data cable for project uploading
and downloading, as shown in Fig. 2.The communication with computer can be realized when it is
connected to the “USB SLAVE” end. The USB communication drive can be installed by the system
in default during software installation, or the drive can be manually installed if it is damaged. The
drive file is saved in the installation directory: “C:\ProgramFiles(x86)\LS\LT Studio 1.2\Driver”.

Fig. 2

2.1.3 Serial port connection

The serial port of the screen is a standard DB 9-pin port supporting communication modes
RS232/485/422, as shown in Fig. 3.Different screen types are integrated with different quantities
of serial ports, and please refer to the Description for Communication Connection for the detailed
connecting method.

1 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Fig. 3

2.1.4 USB Host connection

The screen is integrated with a USB Host device interface. This interface makes it easy to
upload or download the project and the prescript by using the U disk. The sampling or warning
data can also be saved in the U disk via this interface. A mouse or a keyboard with USB interface
can be connected via the USB interface. A set of wireless mouse and keyboard is also usable. As
shown in Fig. 4, a U disk can be directly inserted into the “USB HOST” port and be used.

Fig. 4

2.1.5 Network port using

The standard RJ-45 network interface is used in the screen for communication with any down
unit, as shown in Fig. 5. An RJ-45 plug can be directly inserted into the “Ethernet” port and used.

Fig. 5

2.2 Software downloading and installing

2.2.1 Software downloading

The software “LT Studio” can be downloaded from https://www.leisai.com.There are
different versions according to the different operating systems (XP), as shown in Fig. 6.

Fig. 6

2.2.2 Software installing

Double click the “SETUP.exe” to install the software “LT Studio”, as shown in Fig. 7. Click the
left button to start installation.
2 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Fig. 7

2.2.3 Installation is completed.

Click the button to complete the software installation, as shown in Fig. 8.

Click here to
finish installation

3 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Fig.8

2.3 First use

(1) Click the menu “File”–“New”, or click the shortcut ”, as shown in Fig. 9.

(a)

(b)

Fig. 9

(2) Enter the project name and select the project saving path. The project name can be
Chinese, as shown in Fig. 10.

Fig. 10
(3) Select the touch screen type, as shown in Fig. 11.

4 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Fig. 11
(4) Click the button “Next” and set the bus line communication mode for the touch screen,
as shown in Fig. 12.

(a) HMI Property

(b) COM
5 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

(c) Ethernet PLC (Or Service by Remote HMI)

Fig. 12
(5) After the project is initialized, click the button “Confirm” and the project is created, as
shown in Fig. 13.

Fig. 13
(6) Add an “Input” variable and a “Display” variable into the picture and set the properties,
as shown in Fig. 14.

6 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

(b)
Fig. 14
(7) Click “Offline simulating” button and wait till engineering is completed, as shown in Fig.15.

Fig. 15
(8) Debug with the simulator to view the design effect, as shown in Fig. 16.

(a)

7 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

(b)

2.4 Project download and upload

2.4.1 Project downloading

①Switch on the power supply to the touch screen, select “Download” in the software, and
wait till downloading is completed, as shown in Fig. 25.

8 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Click here to download

Fig. 25
② Select the project downloading mode, USB or network, and click OK to download, as
shown in Fig. 26. If “Communication failure” appears, please check if the downloading line is
correctly connected (USB line or network line). If the downloading operation is failed, please cut
off the power supply to restart the HMI and try again.

Fig. 26
③ Wait till downloading is completed, and then click “OK”, as shown in Fig. 27.

9 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

(a)

(b) Fig.
27

2.4.2 Project downloading from USB disk

①Pack the project in the software and save it into the USB disk, as shown in Fig. 28.

10 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

(a)

(b) Fig.
28
②Insert the USB disk into the touch screen. When the touch screen is activated, press and
hold at any point on the screen with a finger, as shown in Fig. 29.

11 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Press and hold with a

finger after power on

Fig. 29
③Press the button “Setup” for uploading, as shown in Fig. 30. Select “Project” and enter the
password, as shown in Fig. 31. The default password for project management is “888888” which
can be modified in the “Global Setting” of the software.

Fig. 30

12 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

①Click here

②Click to enter the password

Fig. 31
④Select the package file in the USB disk on the tab page “Import” (if project uploading to a
USB disk is needed, please select the tab page “Export”. The path for uploading the project file
needs to be given), and wait till data transmission is completed, as shown in Fig. 32.

(a)

13 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

①Click “Project”
②Click “OK”

(b)

2.4.3 Project uploading

①Click the “Upload” icon on the tool bar, set the communication mode, select to upload
the project, and start to upload the project, as shown in Fig. 20.

14 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Fig. 20
②Enter the password for uploading, as shown in Fig. 21. The default password is “888888”
which can be modified in “Global Settings”, as shown in Fig. 22.

Fig. 21

15 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Fig. 22
③Select the project uploading path and save the file name, and click “Save”.

④If the screen is correctly connected to the computer, the packaging operation will be
started for uploading. Select the “Project” option, and click the “Upload” button, as shown in Fig.
23. When the uploading operation is finished, the “Uploading Success!” dialog box pops up, as
shown in Fig. 24. Then click the “OK” button.

Fig. 23
2.4.4 Project uploading to USB disk.
The uploading to USB disk is similar to the downloading from USB disk. Please see the details
in the Quick start/Project download and upload/Project Downloading from USB disk.
Select “Export the Project” in the 4th step.

2.4.5 Project decompiling

The project upload package file is operated for the project decompiling. The file type is fpg.
Decompiling can create a project package. The function of project package can be seen in Quick
start/Project download and upload/Project uploading or Quick start/Project download and
upload/Project uploading to USB disk.

①Firstly, click the tool button “Decompile”, select the package fpg file, set the project saving

16 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
path, and click the “Decompile” button, as shown in Fig. 17.

Fig. 17
② Enter the password for decompiling. The default password is “888888” which can be
modified can viewed in the “General Setting” of the software, as shown in Fig. 18.

Fig. 18
③After the “Decompile Success!” dialog box appears, click “OK” to complete the
decompiling, as shown in Fig. 19.

Fig. 19

17 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
3 Description for communication connection

LEADSHINE
1 .Serial communication

LT2000 series HMI and Leadshine small PLC

RS232 communication：

RS485 communication：

18 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

LT2000 series HMI and Leadshine medium and large PLC

RS232 communication：

RS485 communication：

19 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Or ( HMI has COM2)

2 .Ethernet communication

20 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
DELTA

▪ DELTA DVP series RS232 cable

▪ DELTA DVP series RS485-2 cable

▪ Registers supported by DELTA DVP:

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes

External output node Y0-9999 —— OOOO
External input node X0-9999 —— OOOO
Internal auxiliary node M0-9999 —— DDDD
Sequence control node S0-9999 —— DDDD
Timer node T0-9999 —— DDDD
Counter node C0-9999 —— DDDD
Timer buffer —— TV0-9999 DDDD
Counter buffer —— CV0-127 DDD
Counter buffer (32 bit) —— CV2 232-255 DDD
Data register —— D0-65535 DDDDD

21 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
FATEK

▪ FATEK FB series RS232 cable

▪ FATEK FB special series RS232 cable

▪ FATEK FB series CB module RS232 cable

▪ FATEK FB series R485-2 cable

▪ registers supported by FATEK FB

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
External output node Y0-9999 —— DDDD
External inputnode X0-9999 —— DDDD
Internal auxiliary node M0-9999 —— DDDD
Sequence control node S0-9999 —— DDDD
Timer node T0-9999 —— DDDD

Counter node C0-9999 —— DDDD

Data register —— R0-9999 DDDD
Data register —— D0-9999 DDDD
Timer buffer —— T0-9999 DDDD
Counter buffer —— C0-199 DDD
Counter buffer (32bit) —— DRC200-255 DDD

22 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Flexem

3 flexem_fl2n_mistubishi_fx2n_compatable
Flexem(MISTUBISHI FX2N COMPATIBLE)
▪ Flexem FL2N series RS232 cable

▪ Flexem FL2N series RS485-2 cable

▪ Registers supported by Flexem FL2N(MISTUBISHI FX2N COMPATIBLE)

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
External input node X000-571 —— OOO
External output node Y000-571 —— OOO
Internal auxiliary node S0000-9999 —— DDDD
Special auxiliary node SM8000-9999 —— DDDD
Timer node T_bit000-255 —— DDD
Counter node C_bit000-255 —— DDD
Timer buffer —— T_word000-255 DDD
Counter buffer —— C_word000-255 DDD
Counter buffer (32 bit) —— C_dword200-255 DDD
Data register —— D0000-7999 DDDD
Special data register —— SD8000-9999 DDDD

23 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4 flexem_fl2n_modbus
FLEXEM FL2N (Modbus compatible protocol)
▪ Flexem FL2N series RS232 cable

▪ Flexem FL2N series RS485-2 cable

▪ Registers supported by Flexem Fl2N (Modbus)

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
External input node X0-571 —— OOO
External output node Y00-571 —— OOO
Internal auxiliary node S0-999 —— DDD
Internal auxiliary node M0-2047 —— DDDD
Special auxiliary node SM0-511 —— DDD
Timer node T_bit0-255 —— DDD
Counter node C_bit0-255 —— DDD
Analog output register —— AQ0-255 DDD
Analog input register —— AI0-255 DDD
Timer buffer —— T_word0-255 DDD
Counter buffer —— C_word0-255 DDD
Counter buffer (32 bit) —— C_dword200-255 DDD
Data register —— D0-4095 DDDD
Special data register —— SD0-511 DDDD

5 Differences between Flexem FL2N(Mistubishi FX2N Compatable) and Flexem

FL2N(Modbus)
Differences between FLEXEM FL2N(MISTUBISHI FX2N COMPATIBLE) and FLEXEM
FL2N(modbus): FLEXEM FL2N(MISTUBISHI FX2N COMPATIBLE) is compatible with Mitsubishi,
while FLEXEM FL2N(modbus) is compatible with MODBUS.

Additional description:

24 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
① If modbus applies PLC Addresses (Base 1), please refer to the table below for the address
correspondence

Device Type Address Protocol address Function code

Y Bit Y0-377 0001-0256 1,5,15
X Bit x0-377 1201-1456 1,5,15
2
M Bit M0-M2047 2001-4048 1,5,15
SM Bit SM0-SM511 4401-4912 1,5,15
S Bit S0-S999 6001-7000 1,5,15
T Bit T0-T255 8001-8256 1,5,15
C Bit C0-C255 9201-9456 1,5,15
D Word D0-D4095 0001-4096 3,6,16
SD Word SD0-SD511 8001-8512 3,6,16
T Word T0-T255 9001-9256 3,6,16
C Word C0-C199 9501-9700 3,6,16
C Double word C200-C255 9701-9756 3,16

② If modbus applies Protocol Addresses (Base 0), please refer to the table below for the
address correspondence

Device Type Address Protocol address Function code

Y Bit Y0-377 0000-0255 1,5,15
X Bit x0-377 1200-1455 1,5,15
2
M Bit M0-M2047 2000-4047 1,5,15
SM Bit SM0-SM511 4400-4911 1,5,15
S Bit S0-S999 6000-6999 1,5,15
T Bit T0-T255 8000-8255 1,5,15
C Bit C0-C255 9200-9455 1,5,15
D Word D0-D4095 0000-4095 3,6,16
SD Word SD0-SD511 8000-8511 3,6,16
T Word T0-T255 9000-9255 3,6,16
C Word C0-C199 9500-9699 3,6,16
C Double word C200-C255 9700-9755 3,16

HCFA

▪ HC series PLC series CPU port RS232 cable

HC serial port programming cable is used to communicate with the HMI device.

25 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
▪ HC series PLC circular 8-pin RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by HCFA HCA2s_HCA2c_HCA2_LX1N_LX1S

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Output relay Y0-571 —— OOO
Input relay X0-571 —— OOO
Internal relay M0-7999 —— DDDD
Timer contact T_bit0-255 —— DDD
Counter contact C_bit0-255 —— DDD
Stepping relay S0-9999 —— DDDD
Special internal relay SM8000-9999 —— DDDD
Data register —— D_word0-7999 DDDD
Special data register —— SD8000-9999 DDDD
Timer current value —— T_word0-255 DDD
Counter current value —— C_word0-255 DDD
▪ Registers supported by HCFA HCA4

▪ Registers supported by HCFA HCA8s_HCA8c_HCA8

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Output relay Y0-764 —— OOO
Input relay X0-764 —— OOO
Internal relay M0-7999 —— DDDD

26 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Timer contact T_bit0-511 —— DDD
Counter contact C_bit0-511 —— DDD
Stepping relay S0-4095 —— DDDD
Special internal relay SM8000-9999 —— DDDD
Data register bit D_bit0.0-7999.F —— DDDD.H
Data register —— D_word0-7999 DDDD
Special data register —— SD8000-9999 DDDD
Timer current value —— T_word0-255 DDD
File register R0-32767 DDDDD
Counter current value —— C_word0-199 DDD
Counter current value —— C_dword200-255 DDD

Hitachi

▪ EHV-CPU_APPLICATION series programming cable

▪ EHV-CPU_APPLICATION series RS232 cable

▪ EHV-CPU_APPLICATION series RS485-4 cable

27 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
▪ Registers supported by EHV-CPU_ APPLICATION

▪ Notice (Similar for other address types)

HollySys

▪ HollySys LM series RS232 cable

▪ HollySys LM series RS485-2 cable

28 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by HollySys LM:

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
External output node Q0.0-4095.7 —— DDDD.O
External inputnode I0.0-4095.7 —— DDDD.O
Intermediate auxiliary register bit M100.0-62535.7 —— DDDDD.O M0-99(Used by
systematic diagnoses)
Analog output register —— QW0-510 DDDD
Analog input register —— IW0-4095 DDDD
Intermediate register —— MW0-8188 DDDD
Intermediate register(32 bit) —— MD0-8186 DDDD

Inovance

▪ Inovance_H2u series CPU port RS232 cable

Inovance serial port programming cable is used to communicate with the HMI device.

▪ Inovance_H2U series communication port RS232 cable

▪ Inovance_H2u series RS485-4 cable

▪ Inovance_H2u series module RS485-4 cable

29 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by Inovance_H2U

Kewei

▪ Kewei cable

▪ Registers supported by Kewei

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Output relay Y0-377 —— OOO
Input relay X0-377 —— OOO
Internal relay M0-7999 —— DDDD
Timer contact T_bit0-255 —— DDD
Counter contact C_bit0-255 —— DDD
Stepping relay S0-9999 —— DDDD
Special internal relay SM8000-9999 —— DDDD

30 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Data register —— D_word0-7999 DDDD
Special data register —— SD8000-9999 DDDD
Timer current value —— T_word0-255 DDD
Counter current value —— C_word0-199 DDD
Counter current value —— C_dword200-255 DDD

KEYENCE

▪ KEYENCE KV-1000-3000 series CPU port RS232 cable

▪ Registers supported by KEYENCE KV-1000-3000:

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Latch relay LR0.0-15999.15 —— DDDDD.DD
Internal auxiliary relay MR0.0-15999.15 —— DDDDD.DD
Control relay CR0.0-639.15 —— DDD.DD
relay R0.0-15999.15 —— DDDDD.DD
Extended data memory —— FM0-32767 DDDDD
Extended data memory —— EM0-65534 DDDDD
High speed counter comparator —— TC0-3999 DDDD
Timer —— TM0-511 DDD
Counter —— CM0-9999 DDDD
Variable address register —— Z0-12 DD
Data memory —— DM0-65534 DDDDD

Kinco

▪ Kinco series RS232 cable

31 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
▪ Kinco series RS485-2 cable

▪ Registers supported by Kinco

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
System internal/external input node I0.0-31.7 —— DD.O
System internal/external output node Q0.0-31.7 —— DD.O
Intermediate auxiliary register M0.0-31.7 —— DD.O
Intermediate bit register VW0.0-4094.7 —— DDDD.O
Analog input register —— AIW0-62 DD
Analog output register —— AQW0-62 DD
Intermediate register —— VW0-4094 DDDD
Intermediate register —— VD0-4092 DDDD

1 ls_mster_cpu_serial
▪ LS Master_K CPU Serial S232 cable

▪ Registers supported by LS Master_K CPU Serial

32 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

2 ls_xgt_cpu_serial
▪ LS XGT CPU Serial RS232 cable

▪ Registers supported by LS XGT CPU Serial

33 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

MEGMEET

▪ MEGMEET M280 series CPU port RS232 cable

▪ MEGMEET M280 series communication port RS232 cable

▪ MEGMEET M280 series RS485-2 cable

34 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
▪ Registers supported by MEGMEET M280
Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Output relay Y0-571 —— OOO
Input relay X0-571 —— OOO
Internal relay M0-10239 —— DDDDD
Timer contact T_bit0-511 —— DDD
Counter contact C_bit0-511 —— DDD
Stepping relay S0-4096 —— DDDD
Special internal relay SM0-511 —— DDD
Auxiliary register —— R0-32767 DDDDD
Data register —— D_word0-7999 DDDD
Special data register —— SD0-511 DDD
Variable address register —— Z0-15 DD
Timer current value —— T_word0-511 DDD
Counter current value —— C_word0-199 DDD
Counter current value —— C_dword200-255 DDD

MIKOM

▪ MIKOM MX1H series CPU port RS232 cable

▪ MIKOM MX1H series RS485-2 cable

▪ Registers supported by MIKOM MX1H

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Output relay Y0-777 —— OOO
Input relay X0-777 —— OOO
Internal relay M0-4095 —— DDDD
Timer contact T_bit0-511 —— DDD

35 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Counter contact C_bit0-511 —— DDD
Stepping relay S0-1535 —— DDDD
Special internal relay SM0-511 —— DDD
Auxiliary register —— Un 0-199 DDD n: 0-7
Data register —— D0-32767 DDDDD
Special data register —— SD0-511 DDD
Variable address register —— Z0-255 DDD
Timer current value —— T_word0-511 DDD
Counter current value —— C_word0-199 DDD
Counter current value —— C_dword200-255 DDD

Mitsubishi

1 Mitsubishi_FX0S_FX0N_FX1S_FX1N_FX2
▪ Mitsubishi FX series CPU port RS232 cable
Mitsubishi serial programming cable is used to communicate with the HMI device.

▪ Mitsubishi FX series communication port RS232 cable

▪ Mitsubishi FX series RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by Mitsubishi FX0S_FX0N_FX1S_FX1N_FX2

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Output relay Y0-571 —— OOO
Input relay X0-571 —— OOO
Internal relay M0-7999 —— DDDD
Timer contact T_bit0-255 —— DDD

36 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Counter contact C_bit0-255 —— DDD
Stepping relay S0-9999 —— DDDD
Special internal relay SM8000-9999 —— DDDD
Data register —— D_word0-7999 DDDD
Special data register —— SD8000-9999 DDDD
Timer current value —— T_word0-255 DDD
Counter current value —— C_word0-255 DDD

2 Mitsubishi FX2N
▪ Mitsubishi FX series CPU port RS232 cable
Mitsubishi serial port programming cable is used to communicate wiht the HMI device.

▪ Mitsubishi FX series communication port RS232 cable

▪ Mitsubishi FX series RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by Mitsubishi FX2N:

37 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Counter current value —— C_word0-199 DDD
Counter current value —— C_dword200-255 DDD

3 Mitsubishi FX3U_FX3G
▪ Mitsubishi FX series CPU port RS232 cable
The Mitsubishi serial port cable is used to communicate between the HMI device and the programming
device.

▪ Mitsubishi FX series communication port RS232 cable

▪ Mitsubishi FX series RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by Mitsubishi FX3U_FX3G

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Output relay Y0-764 —— OOO
Input relay X0-764 —— OOO
Internal relay M0-7999 —— DDDD
Timer contact T_bit0-511 —— DDD
Counter contact C_bit0-255 —— DDD
Stepping relay S0-4095 —— DDDD
Special internal relay SM8000-9999 —— DDDD
Data register bit D_bit0.0-127999.F —— DDDDDD.H
Data register —— D_word0-17999 DDDDD
Special data register —— SD8000-9999 DDDD
Timer current value —— T_word0-511 DDD
File register —— R0-32767 DDDDD
Counter current value —— C_word0-199 DDD
Counter current value —— C_dword200-255 DDD

38 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4 Mitsubishi Melsec Q
▪ Mitsubishi Melsec Series Q RS232 cable

▪ Mitsubishi Melsec Series Q (Special) RS232 cable

▪ Mitsubishi MelsecSeries Q C24 communication module RS232 cable

▪ Mitsubishi Melsec Series Q C24 communication module RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by Mitsubishi Melsec Q:

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes

39 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Data output relay DDY0-7FF —— HHH
Data input relay DX0-7FF —— HHH
Stepping relay S0-2047 —— DDDD
Special link relay SB0-3FF —— HHH
Counter coil CC0-511 —— DDD
Counter contact CS0-511 —— DDD
Accumulative timer coil SC0-511 —— DDD
Accumulative timer contact SS0-511 —— DDD
Timer coil TC0-511 —— DDD
Link relay B0-7FF —— HHH
Variable address relay V0-1023 —— DDDD
Alarm F0-1023 —— DDDD
Latch relay L0-2047 —— DDDD
Internal relay M0-8191 —— DDDD
Output relay Y0-7FF —— HHH
Input relay X0-7FF —— HHH
Timer contact TS0-511 —— DDD
Data register —— D0-11135 DDDDD
File register —— ZR0-65535 DDDDD
Variable address register —— Z0-9 D
Stepping register —— SW0-3FF HHH
File register —— R0-32767 DDDDD
Counter current value —— CN0-511 DDD
Accumulative timer current —— SN0-511 DDD
value
Timer current value —— TN0-511 DDD
Link register —— W0-7FF HHH

5 Mitsubishi_FX3U_ENET_L
▪ Mitsubishi_FX3U_ENET_L cable

40 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by Mitsubishi_FX3U_ENET_L

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Output relay Y0-377 —— OOO
Input relay X0-377 —— OOO
Internal relay M0-7999 —— DDDD
Special internal relay SM8000-8511 —— DDDD
Stepping relay S0-4095 —— DDDD
Timer T0-511 —— DDD
Counter C0-255 —— DDD
Data relay D_bit0-17999.15 —— DDDDD.DD
Data register —— D0-7999 DDDD
Special register —— SD8000-8511 DDDD
File register —— R0-32767 DDDDD
Timer current value —— TV0-511 DDD
Counter current value —— CV0-199 DDD
Counter current value —— CV2 200-255 DDD

6 Mitsubishi_melsec_ethernet
Mitsubishi Melsec Ethernet (Ascii/Bin)
▪ Mitsubishi_Melsec_Ethernet (Ascii/Bin) cable

41 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by Mitsubishi_Melsec_Ethernet (Ascii/Bin)

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Output relay Y0-FFFF —— HHHH
Input relay X0-FFFF —— HHHH
Internal relay M0-65535 —— DDDDD
Special internal relay SM0-65535 —— DDDDD
Latch relay L0-65535 —— DDDDD
Alarm F0-65535 —— DDDDD
Variable address relay V0-65535 —— DDDDD
Link relay B0-FFFF —— HHHH
Timer contact TS0-65535 —— DDDDD
Timer coil TC0-65535 —— DDDDD
Accumulative timer contact SS0-65535 —— DDDDD
Accumulative timer coil SC0-65535 —— DDDDD
Counter contact CS0-65535 —— DDDDD
Counter coil CC0-65535 —— DDDDD
Special link relay SB0-FFFF —— HHHH
Stepping relay S0-65535 —— DDDDD
Data output relay DY0-FFFF —— HHHH
Data input relay DX0-FFFF —— HHHH
Data register —— D0-65535 DDDDD
Special register —— SD0-65535
Link register —— W0-FFFF HHHH
Stepping register —— SW0-FFFF HHHH
Timer current value —— TN0-65535 DDDDD
Accumulative timer current value —— SN0-65535 DDDDD
Counter current value —— CN0-65535 DDDDD
Variable address register —— Z0-65535 DDDDD
File register —— R0-65535 DDDDD
File register —— ZR0-393216 DDDDDD

Modbus

42 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
1 Modbus_RTU
▪ Modbus RTU series RS232 cable

▪ Modbus RTU series RS485-2 cable

▪ Modbus RTU series RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by RTU:

2 Modbus_ RTU _Extend

Modbus RTU Extend
▪ Modbus RTU Extend series RS232 cable

43 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
▪ Modbus RTU Extend series RS485-2 cable

▪ Modbus RTU Extend series RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by Modbus RTU Extend:

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
System internal/external output node 0X1-65535 —— DDDDD
System internal/external input node 1X1-65535 —— DDDDD
Analog input data bit 3X1_BIT1.0- —— DDDDD.DD
65535.15
Data register bit 4X1_BIT1.0- —— DDDDD.DD
65535.15
Analog input data register —— 3X1-65535 DDDDD
Data register —— 4X1-65535 DDDDD
Data register —— 5X1-65535 DDDDD
Data register —— 6X1-65535 DDDDD
Data register —— 3X-DINV1-65535 DDDDD
Data register —— 4X-DINV1-65535 DDDDD

▪ Notice:
4X_DINV and 3X_DINV are the big end format of double word 4X, and it is a word type
address. For example, 4X3 is the hexadecimal 1234, 4X4 is the hexadecimal 5678, and 4X_DINV is
the hexadecimal 12345678.

3 Differences between Modbus_RTU and Modbus_RTU_Extend

Many data memory such as analog input data bit, data register bit and function code data
register are added into Modbus_RTU_Extend on the base of Modbus_RTU.

4 Modbus_ TCP
▪ Modbus TCP cable

44 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by TCP

5 Modbus_ UDP
▪ Modbus UDP cable

45 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by Modbus UDP:

Modbus RTU Server - Serial port service

▪ Modbus RTU Server series RS232 cable

▪ Modbus RTU Server series RS485-2 cable

▪ Modbus RTU Server series RS485-4 cable

46 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by Modbus RTU Server:

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
System internal/external output node LB0-65535 —— DDDDD LBn: 0X(n+1) n: 0-65535
Fox example: LB0 = 0X1
System internal/external input node LB0-65535 —— DDDDD LBn: 1X(n+1) n: 0-65535
Fox example: LB0 = 1X1
Analog input data relay —— LW0-9998 DDDDD LWn: 3X(n+1) n: 0-9998
Fox example: LW0 = 3X1
Analog input data relay —— RW0-55535 DDDDD RWn: 3X(n+10000)
n: 0-55535
Fox example: RW0 =
3X10000
Data register —— LW0-9998 DDDDD LWn: 4X(n+1) n: 0-9998
Fox example: LW0 = 4X1
Data register —— RW0-55535 DDDDD RWn: 4X(n+10000)
n: 0-55535
Fox example: RW0 =
4X10000

Modbus TCP Server– Ethernet service

▪ Modbus TCP Server cable

47 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by Modbus TCP Server

OMRON

Omron CP1H_CP1L
▪ OMRON CP1H_CP1L series RS232 cable

▪ OMRON CP1H_CP11 series (communication module) RS485-2 cable

48 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ OMRON CP1H_CP1L series RS485-4 cable

▪ OMRON CP1H_CP1L series (communication module) RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by OMRON CP1H_CP1L

Panasonic

49 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
▪ Panasonic FP series RS232 cable

▪ Panasonic FP series CPU terminal RS232 cable

▪ Panasonic FP series communication card RS232 cable.

▪ Panasonic FP2/3 series RS232 cable

▪ Panasonic FP series RS485-2 cable

▪ Panasonic FP3 series RS485-4 programming port cable

50 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Panasonic FP series (other modules) RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by Panasonic FP0/FPX:

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes

External output node Y0-9999.F —— DDDD.H
External input node X0-9999.F —— DDDD.H
Timer bit T0-9999 —— DDDD
Counter bit C0-9999 —— DDDD
Link auxiliary node L0-9999.F —— DDDD.H
Internal auxiliary node R0-9999.F —— DDDD.H
T/C current value —— EV0-65535 DDDDD
T/C set value —— SV0-9999 DDDD
Data register —— DT0-99999 DDDDD
Output register —— WY0-32767 DDDDD
Input register —— WX0-32767 DDDDD
Internal auxiliary register —— WR0-32767 DDDDD
Link data register —— LD0-99999 DDDDD
Link register —— WL0-32767 DDDDD
File register —— FL0-99999 DDDDD

Siemens

1 Siemens S7_200

51 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
▪ Siemens S7-200 series RS232 cable
Siemens serial port programming cable is used to communicate with HMI device.

▪ Siemens S7-200 series RS485-2 cable

▪ Registers supported by Siemens S7-200

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Digital output and Peripheral image register node Q.B0.0-127.7 —— DDD.O
Internal memory bit M.B0.0-255.7 —— DDD.O
Digital input and Peripheral image register node I.B0.0-127.7 —— DDD.O
Special memory bit SM.B0.0-4399.7 —— DDDD.O
Variable memory node V.B0.0-81919.7 —— DDDDD.O
Timer bit Tim0-255 —— DDD
Counter bit Cnt0-255 —— DDD
SCR node S.B0.0-255.7 —— DDD.O
Digital output and Peripheral image register —— QW0-14 DD
Digital output and Peripheral image register (32 bit) —— QD0-12 DD
Digital input and Peripheral image register —— IW0-14 DD
Digital input and Peripheral image register (32 bit) —— ID0-12 DD
Internal memory —— MW0-30 DD
Internal memory (32 bit) —— MD0-28 DD
Analog output —— AQW0-62 DD
Analog input —— AIW0-62 DD
SCR —— SW0-30 DD
SCR (32 bit) —— SD0-28 DD
Special memory register —— SMW0-548 DDD
Special memory register (32 bit) —— SMD0-546 DDD
Variable memory —— VW0-10238 DDDDD
Variable memory (32 bit) —— VD0-10236 DDDDD
Timer current value —— Tim0-255 DDD
Counter current value —— Cnt0-255 DDD

2 Siemens S7_200 Network

▪ Siemens S7-200 Network Cable

52 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by siemens S7-200 Network:

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Digital output and Peripheral image register node Q.B0.0-127.7 —— DDD.O
Internal memory bit M.B0.0-255.7 —— DDD.O
Digital input and Peripheral image register node I.B0.0-127.7 —— DDD.O
Variable memory node V.B0.0-65535.7 —— DDDDD.O
Digital output and Peripheral image register —— QW0-14 DD
Digital output and Peripheral image register (32 bit) —— QD0-12 DD
Digital input and Peripheral image register —— IW0-14 DD
Digital input and Peripheral image register (32 bit) —— ID0-12 DD
Internal memory —— MW0-30 DD
Internal memory (32 bit) —— MD0-28 DD
Variable memory —— VW0-8190 DDDDD
Variable memory (32 bit) —— VD0-8188 DDDDD

3 Siemens S7_200 Network Module

▪ Siemens S7-200 Network Module cable

53 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by Siemens S7-200 Network Module

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Digital output and Peripheral image register node Q.B0.0-127.7 —— DDD.O
Internal memory bit M.B0.0-255.7 —— DDD.O
Digital input and Peripheral image register node I.B0.0-127.7 —— DDD.O
Variable memory node V.B0.0-65535.7 —— DDDDD.O
Digital output and Peripheral image register —— QW0-14 DD
Digital output and Peripheral image register (32 bit) —— QD0-12 DD
Digital input and Peripheral image register —— IW0-14 DD
Digital input and Peripheral image register (32 bit) —— ID0-12 DD
Internal memory —— MW0-30 DD
Internal memory (32 bit) —— MD0-28 DD
Variable memory —— VW0-8190 DDDD
Variable memory (32 bit) —— VD0-8188 DDDD

4 Siemens S7_300 MPI

▪ Siemens S7-300 MPI series RS232 cable
SIEMENS serial port programming cable is used to communicate with HMI device.

▪ Siemens S7-300 MPI series RS485-2 cable

54 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by Siemens S7-300 MPI

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
External output node Q.B0.0-511.7 —— DDD.O
External input node I.B0.0-511.7 —— DDD.O
Internal auxiliary node M.B0.0-4095.7 —— DDDD.O
Data register node DBn_DBX0.0-9999.7 —— DDDD.O The main address
can be set during
the hardware
configuration.
External output register —— QW0-126 DDD
External output register (32 bit) —— QD0-124 DDD
External input register —— IW0-126 DDD
External input register (32 bit) —— ID0-124 DDD
Internal register —— MW0-2046 DDDD
Internal register (32 bit) —— MD0-2044 DDDD
Data register —— DBn_DBW0-65534 DDDDD The main address
can be set during
the hardware
configuration.
Data register (32 bit) —— DBn_DBD0-65532 DDDDD The main address
can be set during
the hardware
configuration.

5 Siemens S7_300_network
▪ Siemens S7-300 Network cable

55 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by S7-300 Network

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
External output node Q.B0.0-2047.7 —— DDDD.O
External input node I.B0.0-2047.7 —— DDDD.O
Data register node DBn_DBX0.0-9999.7 —— DDDD.O The main address
can be set during
the hardware
configuration.
External output register —— QW0-2046 DDDD
External output register (32 bit) —— QD0-2044 DDDD
External input register —— IW0-2046 DDDD
External input register (32 bit) —— ID0-2044 DDDD
Internal register —— MW0-2046 DDDD
Internal register (32 bit) —— MD0-2044 DDDD
Data register —— DBn_DBW0-65534 DDDDD The main address
can be set during
the hardware
configuration.
Data register (32 bit) —— DBn_DBD0-65532 DDDDD The main address
can be set during
the hardware
configuration.

6 Siemens S7_1200_network
▪ Siemens S7-1200 Network cable

56 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by S7-1200

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
External output node Q.B0.0-127.7 —— DDD.O
External input node I.B0.0-127.7 —— DDD.O
Internal auxiliary node M.B0.0-2047.7 —— DDDD.O
Data register node DBn_DBX0.0- —— DDDDD.O The main address can be
65535.7 set during the hardware
configuration.
External output register —— QW0-126 DDD
External output register (32 —— QD0-124 DDD
bit)
External input register —— IW0-126 DDD
External input register (32 —— ID0-124 DDD
bit)
Internal register —— MW0-2046 DDDD
Internal register (32 bit) —— MD0-2044 DDDD
Data register —— DBn_DBW0-65534 DDDDD The main address can be
set during the hardware
configuration.
Data register (32 bit) —— DBn_DBD0-65532 DDDDD The main address can be
set during the hardware
configuration.

57 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
THINGET

▪ THINGET Controller series RS232 cable

▪ THINGET Controller Series RS485-2 cable

▪ Registers supported by THINGET Controller:

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Status node S0-99999 —— DDDDD
Counter node C0-99999 —— DDDDD
Timer node T0-99999 —— DDDDD
Interal relay node M0-99999 —— DDDDD
Output relay node Y0.0-303237.7 —— OOOOOO.0
Input relay node X0.0-303237.7 —— OOOOOO.0
FlashROM register —— FD0-9999 DDDD
Data register —— D0-9999 DDDD
Timer —— TD0-9999 DDDD
Counter —— CD0-9999 DDDD

TRIO

1 TRIO _modbus
▪ TRIO_modbus series RS232 cables

58 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ TRIO_modbus series RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by TRIO_modbus

2 TRIO _modbus_extend
▪ TRIO_modbus_extend series RS232 cable

▪ TRIO_modbus_extend series RS485-4 cable

▪ Registers supported by TRIO_modbus_extend

59 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
System internal/external output node 0X1-65535 —— DDDDD
System internal/external input node 1X1-65535 —— DDDDD
Analog input data bit 3X_BIT1.0-65535.15 —— DDDDD.DD
Data register bit 4X_BIT1.0-65535.15 —— DDDDD.DD
Analog input data register —— 3X1-65535 DDDDD
Data register —— 4X1-65535 DDDDD
Data register —— 5X1-65535 DDDDD
Data register —— 6X1-65535 DDDDD
Data register —— 3X-DINV1-65535 DDDDD
Data register —— 4X-DINV1-65535 DDDDD

3 Differences between TRIO _modbus and TRIO _modbus_extend

Many data memory such as analog input data bit, data register bit and data register are
added into TRIO_modbus_extend on the base of TRIO_modbus.

Yaskawa

1 Yaskawa
▪ Yaskawa MP Series SIO (Extension) cable

▪ Registers supported by Yaskawa MP Series SIO (Extension):

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Coil MB0.0-65534.F —— DDDDD.H
Inputrelay IB0.0-FFFF.F —— HHHH.H
Hold register —— MW0-65534 DDDDD
Input register —— IW0-FFFF HHHH

2 Yaskawa network device

▪ Yaskawa UDP Slave cable

60 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Registers supported by Yaskawa UDP slave:

Device Bit Address Word Address Format Notes
Coil MB0.0-65534.F —— DDDDD.H
Inputrelay IB0.0-FFFF.F —— HHHH.H
Output relay QB0.0-FFFF.F —— HHHH.H
Hold register —— MW0-65534 DDDDD
Inputregister —— IW0-FFFF HHHH
Output register —— QW0-FFFF HHHH
Hold register —— ML0-65534 DDDDD

Yokogawa

▪ Yokogawa FA-M3 series RS232 cable

Yokogawa serial port programming cable is used to communicate with the HMI device.

▪ Yokogawa FA-M3 series RS232 cable

61 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

▪ Yokogawa FA-M3 series RS485-4 cable

▪ Yokogawa FA-M3 series RS4852 cable

▪ Registers supported by Yokogawa FA-M3:

62 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4 Detailed manual

4.1 File

1 Save Project
Shortcut key: <Ctrl>+<S>. Save the project being edited.

2 Close Project
Close the current project without exiting the software, usually used for switching among
projects.

3 Save Project As
Use a new path or new name to save the current project (without deleting the previous
project).

4 Project Used Recently

Display the paths of no more than 10 projects opened recently and each one can be directly
opened by clicking.

5 Open Project
Shortcut key: <Ctrl>+<O>. It is used to open an existing project other than any project
repeatedly.
After the software is opened, any project with the file suffix name “*.fsprj” can be opened by
clicking it on the project name.
Remark: if the software is correctly installed, the user can directly open the project by clicking
the corresponding file with the postfix *.fsprj in the Windows Explorer.

6 Create New Project

Shortcut key: <Ctrl>+<N>. It is used to create a new project.
After the project is correctly created, a file folder with the same name will be created to save
the project files related.

63 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Please refer to the “First Use” for the following settings.

7 Transform Project
Convert project from software FD2000 into the current software version. But only the picture
name and the text can be converted, and other parameters must be reset.

8 Exit
Shortcut key: <Alt>+<X>. It is used to close the project and exit the software.

4.2 View

1 Outline
Open/close the outline view, and list all available components on the current window. One or
all components can be quickly hidden or locked.
Display

Lock

Unlock

Hide

2 Project
Open/close project view which the tree structure facilitates the operation such as “HMI
setting”, “window”, “communication connection”, “system setting”, “library”, “macro”, and
“prescription”, and so on. Details can be seen in Detailed manual /Setup.

64 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
3 Current language
Select the current displaying language and the checked language is the current displaying
language.
Note: the language refers to the content edited well by the current project other than
translated by the system automatically!

4 Current Status
The checked Status is the current status. It is used to display the components displaying effect
quickly in different status.

5 Find and Replace

Open/close the Find and Replace view, used to search or replace any word address, bit
address used in the current project.

6 Restore to the Default View

Restore to the Default View– readjust the view arrangement of the software and restore the
default arrangement.

7 Window
Open/close the window view and use the tree structure facilitates modifying the Power-on
Screen, Public Window, Basic Window, Keyboard Window and System Window.

○ 1 Power-on Screen
It is the window displayed at startup. Any picture expected to be used by the user, such as
the company Logo, can be displayed. But it will disappear after a while before entering the
configuration screen. The picture formats supported are BMP, JPG, GIF and PNG.

65 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
○ 2 Common window
The common window always exists and all common window attributes are effective no matter
the configuration screen is on a basic window or a pop-up window. The general effective
components such as t macro and timer can be set in this window.

○ 3 Drop-down Window
TheDrop-down Window can be operated to edit the content of the drop down list when the
configuration screen is running. But this function is only effective for a capacitor screen.

○ 4 Basic Window
The attribute of basic window can be viewed or modified here. The window of number
29001~29006 is provided to log on with the user’s authority for the user. It can be directly used in
the software.

○ 5 Create Basic Window

A new basic window can be created by clicking “Create Basic Window” in the software picture.
The window name, size and other attributes need to be set. The new basic window can also be
created in the default attributes.

○ 6 Keyboard Window
The keyboard window attributes can be viewed or modified after clicking here. And a
customized keyboard can be created which used in the software.

○ 7 System window
The system window can be viewed (it can also be modified under direction) after clicking here,
for example, the system window of “communication information”.

8 Output
Open/close the output view. The compiling information can be output and displayed here.

9 Error
Open/close the error view. All errors collected during compiling are recorded here.

4.3 Edit

1 Cancel
Cancel the operation and go back to the previous one.

2 Recovery
Recover the last action cancelled.

66 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
3 Find/Replace
Set the designated searching range and search the bit address/ word address or replace with
a new bit address/ word address/.

4 Cut
Cut away the selected component and temporarily save it on the clipboard.

5 Copy
Copy the selected component and temporarily save it on the clipboard

6 Multi-Copy
Set the copy range, quantity, interval and direction, and make the addresses change in any
rule to obtain more components (many components can be copies and pasted integrally, and the
addresses will change orderly).

7 Paste
Paste the content of the clipboard onto the project.

8 Delete
Delete the selected components from the project.

9 Inching
Move left/right/up/down for one unit.

10 Alignment
It is effective only when many components are selected. It is used to align these components
on the left, on the vertical middle line, on the right, on the up, on the horizontal middle line, or on
the bottom.

11 Size
It is effective only when many components are selected. It is used to set these components
to the same width, height or same size.

12 Layer
It is effective only when the component is selected. It is used to set the component to the top,
to the bottom, to the previous layer, to the next layer, or set many components in the same
horizontal space or in the same vertical space.

13 Same Color
It is effective only when many components are selected. It is used to set all components in
the same color.

14 Group
Integrate many components.

15 Ungroup
Make the components of group to restore into individuals.

67 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
16 Center horizontally
Center all selected components horizontally in the window.

17 Center vertically
Center all selected components vertically in the window.

18 Lock
Lock the position of the component and stop it from size adjusting or position adjusting.

19 Unlock
Unlock a locked component and restore it to the state that its size or position can be adjusted.

4.4 Window

1 Create New Window

Create a new window and allow the user to set the window number, width, height and any
other basic attribute or function.

2 Delete Window
Delete the selected window

3 Current Window Properties

Set the current window attributes and allow the user to set he window number, width, height
and any other basic attribute or function.

○ 1 Basic

○ 2 Background and Border

68 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

○ 3 Action and Function

The action to open or close a window can be used to activate a bit, a word, a macro command
or switch among windows.

○ 4 Timer
It is used to set an executing cycle. You can execute a macro or directly set a word or a bit
according to the trigger conditions.

69 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

○ 5 Timer Data Transmission

It is used to transmit words or bits in batches. And an action can be set before or after write-
in.

70 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4 Edit Starting LOGO Window

The user can set the properties of the Power-on Screen window (double click the window
after open the Power-on Screen)

5 Show the Public Window

Display/hide the Public Window and facilitate the user to view the effect of the Public
Window displayed/hidden in the Basic Window.

6 Show the Lower Layer Window

Display/hide the lower layer window (the three lower layer windows are effective at the
same time) and facilitate the user to view the effect of lower layer window displayed/hidden in
the basic window.

7 Jump to the Target Window

When the selected component is integrated with a paging function, it is used to jump to the
target screen window.

8 Show Grid

71 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Display the grid and facilitate the user to view the position of components.

9 Grid alignment
Facilitate components aligning by the grid alignment function.

10 Align to alignment line

Activate the function of aligning the components in a line.

11 Grid Setting
Pop up the Grid Setting window. The user can customize the grid color and space here.

12 Window Zoom
Resize the window in a proportion including 50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, 150%, 175%, or 200%.

4.5 Drawing

4.5.1 Straight Line

○ 1 General
• Arbitrarily Line
The user can draw a straight line at will.
• Horizontal
Rotate the straight line drawn by the user to the horizontal position around the center point.

72 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• Vertical
Rotate the straight line drawn by the user to the vertical position around the center point.
• Line
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Bordersettings.
• Arrow
The user can set the arrow pattern in the combo box, see the figure below.

• Position
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Position.
• Rotate
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Rotation.

○ 2 Dynamic Graphics
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Dynamic Graphics for the details.

○ 3 Indicator Light
See Detailed manual/Component/Indicator Light for the details.

○ 4 Display
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Display for the details.

4.5.2 Fold Line

73 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Click the left key to fix the fold line point in drawing. And click the right key to finish drawing.
See details in: Detailed Manual/ Drawing/ Straight Line.

4.5.3 Rectangle

○ 1 General
• Rectangle
A rectangle is set to be drawn by the user.
• Square
Make the rectangle width equal to its length, and thus it is set into a square.
• Border
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Border settings.
• Chamfer
After it is checked, edges of the rectangle drawn by the user can be chamfered in Line type
(as shown in Fig. a) or in Fillet type (as shown in Fig. b). The maximum chamfering length cannot
be larger than 1/2 of the shortest side length.

74 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Position
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Position.
• Rotate
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Rotation.
• Fill
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Filling settings.

• Shadow Effect
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Shadow Effect.

○ 2 Dynamic Graphics
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Dynamic Graphics for the details.

○ 3 Indicator Light
See Detailed manual/Component/Indicator Light for the details.

○ 4 Display
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Display for the details.

4.5.4 Polygon
Draw a polygon by click the polygon tool. You can find the polygon tool in the shortcut tool
bar, the shortcut menu and the pull-down menu.

75 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

A side will be added every time when the left key is clicked. After all sides are obtained, a
polygon can be obtained by clicking the left key and then clicking the right key.

○ 1 General

76 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

(a) Frame line pattern and frame line width (b)Polygon filling color (c)Polygon shadow effect

Please see details for the using method of polygon drawing.

○ 2 Dynamic Graphics

(a) Position control (b) Size control (c) Rotation control

Please see Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Dynamic Graphics for the details.

77 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
○ 3 Indicator Light

(a)
(b)
(c)

(a) Modify the frame color (b) Control the frequency of flickering (c) Modify the filling color

See Detailed manual/Component/Indicator Light for the details.

○ 4 Display
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Display for the details.

4.5.5 Ellipse
Click the ellipse icon on the tool bar by the left key, or select “Ellipse” command from the
menu of Drawing.

78 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Click and hold the editing area in the window, and drag the mouse to modify the ellipse size
and shape.

○ 1 General

(a)

(b)

(c)

(a) Ellipse border color, width and pattern (b) Ellipse filling color (c) Ellipse shadow effect.

○ 2 Dynamic Graphics

(a)
(b)
(c)

(a) Position control (b) Size control (c) Rotation control

79 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Dynamic Graphics for the details.

○ 3 Indicator Light

(a) Modify the frame color (b) Control flickering frequency (c) Modify the filling color

SeeDetailed manual/Component/Indicator Light for the details.

○ 4 Display

80 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
See Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/ Display for the details.

4.5.6 Arc
An arc can be drawn in a designated area. The arc component command can be found on the
tool bar or from the menu of Drawing.

Select the arc component, designate any area to draw, and double click to set the arc
properties.

An arc can be got by setting the properties such as line color, width, type, starting angle, end
angle, position and rotation. It can be freely drawn by dragging the yellow and blue areas.

81 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.5.7 Sector
A sector can be drawn in a designated area. The sector component command can be found
on the tool bar or from the menu of Drawing.

Select the sector component, designate any area to draw, and double click to set the sector
properties.

82 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
A sector can be got by setting the properties such as line color, width, type, starting angle,
end angle, position, rotation, fill color, fill type and shadow effect. It can be freely drawn by
dragging the yellow and blue areas.

4.5.8 Sector Ring

A sector ring can be drawn in a designated area. The sector ring component command can
be found on the tool bar or from the menu of Drawing.

Select the sector ring component, designate any area to draw, and double click to set the
sector ring properties.

83 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

A sector ring can be got by setting the properties such as line color, line width, line type,
starting angle, end angle, position, rotation, fill color, fill type and shadow effect.It can be freely
drawn by dragging the yellow and blue areas.

4.5.9 Static Picture

In this software, the “Static Picture” function will be used frequently. This function can make
the whole project more clear and beautiful. The static picture command can be found from the
shortcut tool bar or the pull-down menu of Drawing.

84 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
After the static picture component is selected, drag by the left key of the mouse, and then
the corresponding properties window will pop up.

Local picture in the computer or in the software picture library can be imported by clicking
the “Import from File” button or the “Import from Lib” button. And the picture will be put into
the window by clicking the “OK” button.

The static picture position can be modified. You can change the position by manually dragging
or by setting the coordinates in the static picture properties window. The static picture size can
be modified, too.

85 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The static picture size and position can be fixed if the “Locked” is checked. And the static
picture can be rotated around a fixed point. The fixed point and rotation angle can be set. The
picture can be manually rotated (in any angle) after the fixing angle is set.

The static picture size can be set in the properties window by the Scaling function. It can be
set either by checking “Lock Aspect Ratio” (the fixed horizontal/vertical ratio) or by checking “Use
original size” (keeping the original size).

86 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The picture effect can be beautified by the Shadow Effect function so that it can be
differentiated from the background.

The static picture can be set to display only when the corresponding conditions are satisfied.
The user can choose that the static picture is displayed all the time or displayed in conditions by
setting the Display properties. The conditional display type includes Level User, Privilege User and
Logic Control.

Level User: The static picture will be displayed only in the corresponding user level. It can be
activated by checking it.

87 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Privilege User: The static picture visibility control needs an authority. The authority system

settings dialog can be opened by clicking the button “ ”.

Logic Control: The static picture visibility can be controlled by the address conditions. The
conditions include bit control (address ON and OFF) and word control (word address value
conditions).

88 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The static picture can be converted into a dynamic one by logic control. Static pictures can
be quickly switched by picture stacking and the control address.

When the control address is fixed, the position, size and rotation can be controlled. E.g.:
when there are many sector pictures, they can be set to display rotating effect by setting the
Control Rotating.

89 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.5.10 Static Text

When editing in the software, a lot of texts will be used for marking, displaying and describing,
and thus the project edited can be easy to understand. The Static Text command can be found
from the shortcut tool bar or the menu of Drawing.

When click the Static Text command, the properties dialog will pop up. The content of the
static text to be displayed can be written into the Tag Contents. The font, size, color and alignment
mode can be set here.

90 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

These properties such as the current text font, size, color and the alignment mode can be
copied to make future texts uniform.

The function “Language Independent” can be checked to make sure the text is not influenced
by other languages.

91 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Sometimes, the project is provided to the users in different countries. You can set the
different contents by switching Languages. Thus different texts can be displayed in different
languages.

Multi languages can be set in System Settings dialog which is opened by clicking the button

“ ” to satisfy the different languages requirement.

92 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

When you check the “Set label position by language state separately” function, different texts
can be aligned in different effects.

The static text can be used which is saved in the text library. The text library dialog can pop
up by clicking the “Text Library” button. You can enter the text in the text library dialog in
advanced and select it to use.

93 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The static text can be set to a designated position, and the text can be locked to prevent any
displaying defect caused by moving.

When the text includes a lot of words and characters, the revolving displaying function can
be used to save the space. The revolving displaying function can be used by checking the
“Marquee” function. The moving direction and the revolving displaying speed can be set in the
properties dialog of the static text.

94 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Similar to static picture functions, the static text can be also set to display only if necessary.
The user can choose that the static text is displayed all the time or displayed in conditions by
setting the Display properties. The conditional display type includes Level User, Privilege User and
Logic Control.

Level User: The static text will be displayed only in the corresponding user level. It can be
activated by checking it. The user level system settings dialog can be opened by clicking the button

“ ”.

Privilege User: The static text visibility control needs an authority. The authority system

settings dialog can be opened by clicking the button “ ”.

95 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Logic Control: The static text visibility can be controlled by the address conditions. The
conditions include bit control (address ON and OFF) and word control (word address value
conditions).

4.6 Component

4.6.1 Switch
The Switch component includes Bit Set, Word Set, Window Operation, Function Key, Data
Transferring and Recipe Transmission.

96 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.1.1Bit Set

“Bit Set” is a component by which the internal bit address of HMI or the bit address of each
controller connected to HMI is operated. The type of “Execute Setting” includes “On”, “Off”,
“Inverse”, “Reset”, “On Pulse” and “Off Pulse”.

• On
Set the bit address to ON.
• Off
Set the bit address to OFF.
• Inverse
It is set a “Switch” by which the current state can be conversed. If the current bit address is

97 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
ON, after it is operated, the bit address will be conversed to OFF. If the current bit address is OFF,
after it is operated, the bit address will be conversed to ON.
• Reset
When it is operated and kept being held, the bit address is set at the ON state all the time.
When it is released, the state of the bit address will be immediately switched to OFF.
• On Pulse
A rising edge pulse is produced which the bit address keeps the pulse “on” in a designated
time width. The pulse width range is 0.1~1.5 seconds.

• Off Pulse
A falling edge pulse is produced which the bit address keeps the pulse “off” in a designated
time width. The pulse width range is 0.1~1.5 second.

For the “On Pulse”, if the pulse width is set to 1 second and the current bit state is OFF, a 1
second ON pulse signal will be produced and then it goes back to the OFF state. If the current bit
state is ON, a 1 second ON time will be still set because the bit state is already ON, and then the
bit state will turn OFF.

Similar to the “Off Pulse”, if the pulse width is set to 1 second and the current bit state is ON,
a 1 second OFF pulse signal will be produced and then it goes back to the ON state. if the current
state is OFF, a 1 second OFF time will be still set because the bit state is already OFF, and then the
bit state will turn ON.

There is an “Action” attribute for the Bit Set component. It includes two options, “Press” and
“Release”. When the “Bit Set” component is pressed down, the bit set function will be executed
immediately. When the “Release” attribute is selected and the “Bit set” component is pressed,

98 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
the bit set function will not be executed. And when it is released, the “Bit set” function will be
executed immediately. But the action is not valid when the “Execute Setting” is “Reset”.

The “Bit Set” component has other property pages. For example, in the “Indicator Light”
property page, it is recommended to check the “Use Indicator” option and set an address to
monitor the “Bit set” component state if the “Use Graphics” option is checked in the “Graphics”
property page. The details can be seen in the “System Manual/ Component/ Indicator Light”.

The following brief example introduces the process for setting the HMI internal address
LB100 into the “Inverse” attribute.

• In the software menu, click “Component/ Switch/ Bit Set” to open the following dialog.

The default action is “Press”. The default Execute Setting is “On”. The default address is “LB0”.
They are modified into the required as follows.

99 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Click “OK” to add an operation action in the “Switch” list.

In the list, we can clearly see the execution attribute and the bit address to be operated.

Click “OK” in the Switch dialog to put the component into the window edited. In this way, a
simple “Bit Set” component is finished.

4.6.1.2 Word Set

“Word Set” is a component by which various attributes of the internal word register of HMI
or the word register of any controller connected to HMI are controlled. The Word Set property
dialog can be opened by clicking the “Component/ Switch/ Word Set” in the menu. The default
settings are shown as follows.

100 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The type of “Execute Settings” includes “Add”, “Subtract”, “Increase”, “Decrease”, “Set Up
Constants”, “Set Up Character Strings”, “Set Up Figures By Bit” and “Logic Operation”.

• Add
A designated data will be added to the value of the designated word register. The “Add”
attributes contain the following settings.

101 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Add

At each time of operation, the set data will be added and written into the word register.

➢ Upper Limit

It is the upper limit of the word register operated. When the result reached the upper limit
of operation, no further “Add” operation can be done.

➢ Looping

If “Looping” is checked, an option of “Lower limit” will appear. The operation will be
continued at the upper limit and the adding operation will be done from the lower limit. For
example, if the “Lower limit” is set to “0”, the “Add” is set to “1”, and the upper limit is set to
“100”, the Word Set component will be valid when it is added to “100”. It will turn to 0, 1, 2, 3,and
so on, at the next operations.

➢ Reverse on reaching the end

If “Reverse on reaching the end” is checked, the operation will be continued at the upper
limit and the result will change to reduce from the upper limit to the lower limit. When the result
reached the lower limit, the operation will change to add.

The “Add”, “Upper limit” and “Lower limit” are all “Constant” in default. They can also be set
into “Variable”. It is noted that the data type of variable register must comply with the “Word Set”
component address type.

• Subtract
A designated data will be subtracted from the value of the designated word register till the
“Lower limit”. The “Subtract” attributes contain the following settings.

102 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Subtract
At each time of operation, the set data will be subtracted from the word register.

➢ Lower Limit

It is the lower limit of the word register operated. When the result reached the lower limit of
operation, no further “Subtract” operation can be done.

➢ Looping

If “Looping” is checked, an option of “Upper limit” will appear. The operation will be
continued at the lower limit and the subtraction will be done from the upper limit. For example,
if the “Lower limit” is set to “0”, the “Subtract” is set to “1”, and the upper limit is set to “100”,
the Word Set component will be valid when it is subtracted to “0”. It will turn to 100, 99, 98,
97,and so on, at the next operations.

➢ Reverse on reaching the end

If “Reverse on reaching the end” is checked, the operation will be continued at the lower
limit and the result will change to add from the lower limit to the upper limit. When the result
reached the upper limit, the operation will change to subtract.

• Increase
The result value will keep increasing if the component of “Increase” is pressed down. The
increasing will stop if the component of “Increase” is released or the value reaches the upper limit.
The component of “Increase” has attributes of “Immediately Execute Increase/Decrease Action”,
“Delaying Time” and “Execution Time”.

103 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Immediately Execute Increase/Decrease Action

“Increase” and “Decrease” all have this attribute. If it is checked, the operation of “Increase”
or “Decrease” will be executed immediately without waiting when the component is pressed
down.

➢ Delaying Time

When the attribute of “Immediately Execute Increase/Decrease Action” is not checked, the
“Delaying time” attribute is valid. The default time is 0.1s and the maximum is 1.5s. If the time is
0.1s, it means the action of “Increase” will be delayed 0.1s to execute after the component is
pressed down.

➢ Execution Time

The “Execution Time” means the time to execute the action “Increase” once. The time range
is 0.1s ~ 1.5s.

• Decrease
The function of “Decrease” is similar to the attribute of “Increase”. The result value will keep
decreasing if the component of is pressed down. The component of “Decrease” also has attributes
of “Immediately Execute Increase/Decrease Action”, “Delaying Time” and “Execution Time”.

104 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Set Up Constants
A data is written to the designated register. The data (Setting Value) can be a “Constant” or
a “Variable”.

In the figure above, a constant “0” is written to the register LW0 of HMI.

• Set Up Character Strings

This function is similar to “Set Up Constants”. A character string can be written to the word
register. For example, character string “A123” is written to the register LW0 and LW1 of HMI.

105 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

“Set Up Character Strings” has two optional attributes “Use UNICODE” and “Swap high and
low bytes”. When “Use UNICODE” is checked, it means the character string written to registers is
coded by UNICODE. The string is normally displayed only in “UNICODE”. If “Swap high and low
bytes” is checked, the high and low bytes in the character string will be exchanged before written
to the word register.

• Set Up Figures By Bit

This function has two modes, “Add” and “Subtract”. By this function, each bit of the value
can be added or subtracted.

This function has an attribute “Date type”. It can be “16-bit Unsigned” or “32-bit unsigned
number”. In other words, only unsigned single word and unsigned double word can use this
function. If the data type is “16-bit unsigned number”, the value range is 0~65535. So the
parameter of this function “Digit bit” can be 1~5. That means the number length is 1~5. “1” means
units digit, “2” means tens digit, “3” means hundreds digit, “4” means thousands digit, and “5”
means ten thousands digit. For example, if the “Digit bit” is 3 and the “Mode” is “Add”, it means
the hundreds digit is operated for adding. If the hundreds digit of a register is 6 and when this
component is pressed down, the hundreds bit will change into 7, and then into 8 if it is pressed

106 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
down again, and 9 again, 0 again, and 1 again, so the attribute of “Add” is similar to the “Looping”
attribute. But, the “Add” or “Subtract” attribute of the “Set up Figures by Bit” function is only valid
for one digit, and other digits are not changed.

For example, if “Digit bit” is 3, “Mode” is “Add”, and the current register value is 18668, the
value will change into 18768 when the component is pressed down, 18868 when it is pressed
down again, 18968 again, 18068 again, 18168 again. The maximum value of a single word is 65535.
If the “Digit bit” is 5, the ten thousands digit will change in 0~5.

• Logic Operation
This function has four modes, “And”, “Or”, “Exclusive-or” and “Not”. The default mode is
“Add”.

In the figure above, when the component is operated, the value in register LW0 will has a
logic operation“And” with 0×FFFF. The logic result will be written to register LW0. The operations
of otherthree modes are similar to “And” mode but the logic operation.

The attribute “Operation Value” can be “Constant” or “Variables”. The default is “Constant”
and the data format is hexadecimal. It can be a variable, but the data type must comply with the
register data type.

The attribute “Data Type” for logic operation can be “16-bit Unsigned”, “32-bit Unsigned”,
“16-bit BCD” and “32-bit BCD”.

Special notice:
In all these functions for “Word Set”, the “Action” is “Press” in default. That means the
operation will be executed correspondingly when the component is pressed down. The “Action”
can also be “Release” but not for the function “Increase” and “Decrease”. That means the
operation will be executed correspondingly when the component is released.

107 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
When use “Variables” for the “Word Set” function, the data type of “Variables” must comply
with the data type of word register used. If not, the result may be incorrect.

4.6.1.3 Window Operation

• Action
The attribute “Action” of “Window Operation” can be “Press” or “Release”.

➢ Press
The corresponding keyboard function will be given out when the component is pressed down,
and the macro instructions or system operation instructions will be executed.

➢ Release
The corresponding keyboard function will be given out when the component is released, and
the macro instructions or system operation instructions will be executed.

• Set Up

The attribute “Set Up” of “Window operation” can be “Switch Window”, “Close Pop-up
Window”, “Pop-up”, “Return To Previous Window”, “Window Control Bar” or “Return to the main
window (HOME)”.

➢ Switch Window
Close the current window and switch to a designated window.

➢ Close Pop-up Window

Put the button on the pop-up window, click to close it.

➢ Pop-up

108 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Pop up a designated window.

➢ Return To Previous Window

Close the current window and open the window opened last time.

➢ Window Control Bar

Put the component on the pop-up window, press, hold and drag to modify the pop-up
window position.

➢ Return to the main window (HOME)

Close the current window and open the preset main window. The main window can be set
by the menu command “Setup -> System Setting –> General Setting”.

109 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Automatic pop-up password window

If “Automatic pop-up password window” is checked and when the window operation is
switched to a window in a higher password or authority level, the window to enter password will
pop up automatically.

4.6.1.4 Function Key

The “Function Key” component provides component executing action, keyboard function,
executing macro instructions, and system operation functions.

• Action
The attribute “Action” of “Function Key” can be “Press” or “Release”.

➢ Press
The corresponding keyboard function will be given out when the element is pressed down,
and the macro instructions or system operation instructions will be executed.

➢ Release
The corresponding keyboard function will be given out when the component is released, and
the macro instructions or system operation instructions will be executed.

110 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• Function Setting
The attribute “Function Setting” of the “Function Key” includes “Keyboard Function”,
“Execute Macro” , “System Operation” and “Print”.
➢ Keyboard Function

“Return”

It is the same to the “Enter” key on the keyboard.

“Backspace”

It is the same to the “Backspace” key on the keyboard.

“Clear”

Delete the current content which has been inputted for the component “Numeric Value Input”
and “Character Input”.

“Cancel

Cancel the component operation of “Numeric Value Input” and “Character Input”.

“UNICODE”

Set the type of characters which inputted to the component “Character Input”. The
characters can be number keys (0, 1, 2…), letters of an alphabet (a, b, c…), ASCII code or Unicode
characters.

“Move the Cursor”

Move the cursor according to the set modes including up, down, left, right, row beginning,
row end, first bit and last bit. This function is effective only for the input component.

“Select the Text”

111 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Set the operation for the selected text content, including “Selection Begin” and “Selection
End”. This function is effective only for the input component.

“Text Operation”

Set the operation for the text content, including “Copy”, “Cut” and “Paste”. This function is
effective only for the input component.

“Mapping Keyboard”

When this function is activated, corresponding functions can be mapped to F1~F8 of HMI,
including forward, backward, Esc, Enter, and so on. This function is effective only for some
specified HMI.

➢ Execute Macro

If this function is selected, the selected macro will be executed when the component is
pressed down or released. The “Macro Instruction” dialog will pop up if you click the button
“Macro Code” or “Edit”. You can select or create a macro here, or edit the current macro.

➢ System Operation

“Touch Panel Calibration”

By using this function, the user can enter the touch control calibrating window. Screen touch
control calibration for HMI can be realized in this window.

“Import/Export”

112 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
When this function is selected, the project or prescription data can be imported or exported.
This function must be used together with the file view box, and it only supports the HMI with USB
HOST or SD card slot.

“Save Screenshot to Extended Memory”

When this function is selected, the touch screen picture can be captured and saved into an
external memory device in the bmp format for printing or viewing HMI picture. And this function
only supports the HMI with USB HOST or SD card slot.

“Clear Event”

This function can be used to clear warning events in groups.

“Clear All Formula”

This function can be used to clear all prescription data.

“Clear RW”

This function can be used to clear all RW data saved in power failure.

“Clear All History”

This function can be used to clear all history data. It can be used together with other switch
components.

4.6.1.5 Data Transferring

The “Data Transferring” component can be used to transmit the data saved in one or more
continuous addresses to another one or other more continuous addresses.

113 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Action
The attribute “Action” can be “Press” or “Release”. When “Press” is selected, data
transmission will be started when the component is pressed down. When “Release” is selected,
data transmission will be executed when the component is released.

➢ Data Type
The “Data Type” means the type of data to be transmitted. It can be “Bit” or “Word”.

➢ Transmission words
It means the number of data transmitted at one time. It can be set “Constant” or “Variable”.
If set “Variable”, the register address must be designated. The maximum number of words
transmitted in this software is 8192.

➢ Source Address
The “Source Address” means the first address of the data to be transmitted. The detailed can
be seen in theDetailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Bit Address Input
orDetailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

➢ Destination address
The “Destination address” means the first address of data transmission target. The detailed
can be seen in the Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Bit Address
Inputor Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

4.6.1.6 Recipe Transmission

The “Recipe Transmission” component includes two transmission directions: “Download

recipe to PLC” and “Upload recipe from PLC”. “Download recipe to PLC” means transmitting the
content of the recipe file to the address of PLC. “Upload recipe from PLC” means transmitting data
from the address of PLC to the recipe file.

114 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Download recipe to PLC

It’s the default setting for the “Transmission Direction”.

• Upload Recipe from PLC

If the “Upload Recipe from PLC” is selected, the recipe uploading function will be activated.

The detailed operation of the recipe uploading can refer to the recipe downloading.

➢ Recipe source address

When no recipe file is created, the “Recipe source address” will be blank with a red
exclamatory mark. You can click the button “Open the Recipe Settings” to create recipe. After the
recipe is created, you can select it in “Recipe source address” to download.

Notice:

The “Number of words” is determined by the recipe itself, and it always displays
automatically.

➢ PLC Address
“PLC Address” means the target address for recipe file data transmission. It can be the
address of PLC connected to HMI or an internal address of HMI. The detailed address editing
method can be seen in: Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/ Standard Byte
Address Input.

115 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
➢ Notice Bit Address
A bit address can be set here to monitor the recipe downloading state. The address editing
method can be seen in: Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Bit Address
Input. This bit address will be kept on during the recipe downloading or uploading, and it will be
set to OFF after transmission.

4.6.2 Indicator Light

4.6.2.1 Bit Indicator Light

• Display Mode
The “Display Mode” can be “Register Control” or “Automatic looping”. The details are
referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Display Mode.

• Bit Register
The component is a bit indicator when “Bit Register” is selected. The method to input bit
address can be seen in: Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Bit Address
Input.

• Status No.
The status of a bit address can be ON or OFF. So it is 2 here in default and can not be modified.

• Condition
➢ Positive Logic
State 0 is OFF and state 1 is ON.

➢ Negative Logic
State 0 is ON and state 1 is OFF.

• Flash Mode
116 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
It includes three modes: “None”, “Blink Text” and “Blink Picture”. You can select each status
in left table and then set the flash mode for the status selected.

➢ None
It means no flashing.

➢ Blink Text
Text can flash in a frequency.

➢ Blink Picture
Picture can flash in a frequency.

• Flash Freq.
Picture or text will flash in a designated frequency. The frequency can be a multiple of 0.1
second.

Detailed attribute information of the current bit indicator light can be seen in the table at the
left bottom.

4.6.2.2 Word Indicator Light

• Display Mode
The “Display Mode” can be “Register Control” or “Automatic looping”.

• Word Register
The component is a word indicator when “Word Register” is selected. The method to input
bit address can be seen in: Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte
Address Input.

• Status No.

117 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The range of the status number is 1~256. Each status corresponds to the value of the word
address.When many statuses satisfy the condition at the same time, only the status with the
minimum value will be effective.

• Condition
➢ Range
The status content (value) will be determined according to the comparison and logic
operation result of the word address value. The comparison operation includes “>”, “<”, “>=”,
“<=”, “==” and “!=”. The logic operation can be “AND”, “OR” or “None”.

➢ Bit
Text or picture can be displayed according to the state of one bit of the word address, e.g.:
bit LW0.1 of address LW0.

“Positive Logic” means that State 0 is OFF and state 1 is ON.

“Negative Logic” means that State 0 is ON and state 1 is OFF.

• Flash Mode
It includes three modes: “None”, “Blink Text” and “Blink Picture”. You can select each status
in left table and then set the flash mode for the status selected.

➢ None
It means no flashing.

➢ Blink Text
Text can flash in a frequency.

➢ Blink Picture
Picture can flash in a frequency.

• Flash Freq.

118 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Picture or text will flash in a designated frequency. The frequency can be a multiple of 0.1
second.

Detailed attribute information of the current word indicator light can be seen in the table at
the left bottom.

• Illegal Input
The value of word address doesn't satisfy the condition preset.

➢ Show Error Status

The indicator displays the “Error” status when illegal input happened. That is the last status
displayed in the table.

➢ Keep Current status

The indicator keeps the current status when illegal input happened.

• Error Notification
You can select a bit address here. It will be set to ON if the word address value doesn’t satisfy
with the condition. It will be set to OFF when the condition is satisfied.

4.6.2.3 Multi Bit Combination Indicator Light

119 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Display Mode
The “Display Mode” can be “Register Control” or “Automatic looping”.

• Combined Bits
The status displayed is determined by a multi bit combination condition.

• Bit No.
The condition can be a combination of 2~32 bits. The “Bit No.” means the number of bits.

• Data Type
➢ Unsigned
If the number of bits is n, the combination value will be 0~2n-1.

➢ Signed
If the number of bit is n, the combination value will be -2n-1~2n-1-1.

• Starting Address
The starting address is closely associated to the number of bits. For example, if the starting
address is LB0 and the number of bits is 2, a combination will be formed. LB1 will be the high bit
and LB0 will be the low bit. The range of 2 bits combination value will be 0~3 if the data type is
unsigned. The range of 2 bits combination value will be -2~1 if the data type is signed.

• Status No.
The range of the status number is 1~256. Each status corresponds to the value of the word
address.When many statuses satisfy the condition at the same time, only the status with the
minimum value will be effective.

• Condition
➢ Range

120 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The status content (value) will be determined according to the value of the
combined bits. The comparison operation includes “>”, “<”, “>=”, “<=”, “==” and “!=”.
The logic operation can be “AND”, “OR” or “None”.

• Flash Mode
It includes three modes: “None”, “Blink Text” and “Blink Picture”. You can select each status
in left table and then set the flash mode for the status selected.

➢ None
It means no flashing.

➢ Blink Text
Text can flash in a frequency.

➢ Blink Picture
Picture can flash in a frequency.

• Flash Freq.
Picture or text will flash in a designated frequency. The frequency can be a multiple of 0.1
second.

Detailed attribute information of the current component can be seen in the table at the left
bottom.

121 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Illegal Input
The multi bit combination value doesn't satisfy the condition preset.

➢ Show Error Status

The indicator displays the “Error” status when illegal input happened. That is the last status
displayed in the table.

➢ Keep Current status

The indicator keeps the current status when illegal input happened.

• Error Notification
You can select a bit address here. It will be set to ON if the multi bit combination value doesn’t
satisfy the condition. It will be set to OFF when the condition is satisfied.

4.6.2.4 Display Mode

You can find the “Display Mode” if you check the “Use Indicator” in the property TAB of
“Indicator Light”. The display modes include “Register Control” and “Automatic looping”.

122 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
1 Register mode
The “Register Control” mode can be Bit Registers, Word Registers or Combined
Bits.

2 Automatic looping
All the status will be cycled to display according to the specified frequency if the
display mode is “Automatic looping”. The unit of frequency is 100 milliseconds. The
setting is shown as below.

4.6.3 Numeric Value and Character Display

4.6.3.1 Numeric Value Display

4.6.3.1.1 General

• Operation Attribute

The “Operation Attribute” includes four operation types: “Numeric Display”,” Numeric
Input”,” Character Display” and “Character Input”. The operation type of this current component
can be modified here. It is highly efficient for the project modifying and maintaining.

123 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Password

When the “Password” is checked, “*” will be displayed in the component (See the figure
below). It is always used for the numeric value input component. The numeric value display
component is not used generally.

• Read Address

➢ Use Address Tag

124 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

When this function is checked, variables in the address tag library can be directly linked by
the component (See address tag library details in:Detailed manual/Library/Address Tag Library).
The address tag library can be used to improve the project maintaining efficiency. If many
components in the project are linked to a same variable in the address tag library and this address
need to be modified, it is only necessary to modify the variable address linked in the tag library
without modifying each component.

• Address setting

The address setting includes the attributes : “Device”, “Address Type”, “Address”, “Format
(Range)”, “Address Index”, and so on. Please see: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Address
editor/ Standard Byte Address Input.

4.6.3.1.2 Number Format

125 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• Data Type

The “Data Type” can be “16-bit Signed”, “16-bit Unsigned”, “32-bit Signed”, “32-bit
Unsigned”, “16-bit BCD”, “32-bit BCD”, “16-bit Hexadecimal”, “32-bit Hexadecimal”, “16-bit
Binary”, “32-bit Binary” or “Single precision floating point number”.

• Data setting

The “Data setting” includes “Integer digits”, “Decimal Point”, “Display Positive Sign” and
“Zero Padding Left”.

126 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The “Integer digits” means the integer digit number of the data. The “Decimal Point” means
the decimal digit number of the data.

Note: when the data type is an integer and the decimal bit is not zero, the value displayed
will reduce to satisfy the decimal digit number. For example, if the data is an integer “55” and two
decimal bits are set, the value displayed will be “0.55”. In fact, only the value and the type of the
data displayed can be modified by this function. The actual value and the actual type are not
modified. It is still the integer “55”.

• Upper/Lower Limit of Number

127 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
You can set the data upper limit in “Minimum” and the data lower limit in “Maximum”. And
you can set the font color of the data beyond the limit. When the “Flicker” is checked, the text will
flash when the data is less than the lower limit or greater than the upper limit.

• Enable Number Operation

➢ Proportion convert

When the function of “Proportion Convert” is activated, the value displayed will be the result
after proportional conversion. The proportional conversion formula is displayed when you click
the button “Explain”.

➢ Zoom

128 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

When the function of “Zoom” is selected, the value displayed will be the result after zooming
conversion. The zooming conversion formula is displayed when you click the button “Explain”.

➢ Logic Operation

129 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The data can be logically operated by the component which the logic operation can be “And”,
“Or” or “Exclusive or”. And the result of logic operation will be displayed.

➢ Shift

The data can be shifted left or right by the component. And the result of shifting operation
will be displayed.

4.6.3.1.3 Font

130 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The detailed font setting can be seen: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/
Font Settings.

4.6.3.1.4 Graphics

The detailed graphics setting can be seen: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Drawing/ Graphic edit.

4.6.3.1.5 Dynamic Graphics

The detailed graphics setting can be seen: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Drawing/ Dynamic Graphics.

4.6.3.1.6 Display

The detailed display setting can be seen: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Drawing/ Display.

131 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.3.2 Numeric Value Input

The attributes setting of the “Numeric Value Input” component is generally same to the
“Numeric Value Display” component. The differences are detailed as below.

4.6.3.2.1 General

• Password

When the “Password” is checked, “*” will be displayed in the component (See the figure
below). It can be checked if the current component is used to input the password.

• Reading Address” and “Writing Address

132 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The numeric value input component is integrated with functions of reading data from an
address and writing data to an address. When the “Reading And Writing Address Is Different” is
not checked, the using method is same to the “Numeric Value Display” component. When the
“Reading And Writing Address Is Different” is checked, different address can be set in the “Read
Address” and in the “Write Address”.

4.6.3.2.2 Keyboard Setting

See detailed functions in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/ Keyboard setting.

4.6.3.3 Character Display

4.6.3.3.1 General

• Operating Attribute

133 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The “Operation Attribute” includes four operation types: “Numeric Display”,” Numeric Input”,
“Character Display” and “Character Input”. If you want the current Character Display component
change to the Character Input component or Numeric component, you can modify it here. It is
highly efficient for the project modifying and maintaining.

• Browse Method

The “Browse Method” includes “Scrollbar” and “Screen”. You can select the “Scrollbar” or
the “Screen” or both ways to browse the content of the current character component. The
scrollbar width can be freely set. The “Screen” browse method is only effective for a capacitive
screen.

• Display Mode

134 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ ASCII
If it is checked, characters will be displayed in ASCII format. In this format, only ASCII
characters will be displayed, including numbers, symbols and English letters. Chinese characters
are not supported to display.

➢ Password
If it is checked, characters will be displayed in “*” mode.

➢ Unicode
If it is checked, characters will be displayed in UNICODE. In the UNICODE mode, each Chinese
character or English letter will occupy one character (two bytes).

➢ Swap the High byte and the Low byte

After the “ASCII” is checked, you can select the function “Swap the High byte and the Low
byte”.

• Read Address

➢ Use Address Tag

135 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

When this function is checked, variables in the address tag library can be directly linked by
the component (See address tag library details in: Detailed manual/Library/Address Tag Library).
The address tag library can be used to improve the project maintaining efficiency. If many
components in the project are linked to a same variable in the address tag library and this address
need to be modified, it is only necessary to modify the variable address linked in the tag library
without modifying each component.

4.6.3.3.2 Characters setting

• Row Settings

136 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The “Row Settings” includes “Total Row number”, “Show Row number” and “Number of
Characters per line”. The “Total Row number” means the number of the rows which the current
character component contains. The “Show Row number” sets the number of rows displayed in
the current character component. If the number of rows displayed is smaller than the number of
total rows, a scrollbar will appear automatically.

• Row Space settings

A dialog will pop up when you click the “Row Space Settings” button. You can set the
attributes such as “Horizontal scaling”, “Line space”, “Words space”, “shadow Effects”, and so on.

137 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.3.3.3 Font

See detailed font setting in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/ Font settings.

4.6.3.3.4 Graphics

See detailed Graphics setting in: Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Graphic

edit.

4.6.3.3.5 Dynamic Graphics

See detailed Dynamic Graphics setting in: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Drawing/ Dynamic Graphics.

4.6.3.3.6 Display

See detailed display setting in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/Display.

138 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.3.4 Character Input

4.6.3.4.1 General

• Operation Attribute

The “Operation Attribute” includes four operation types: “Numeric Display”,” Numeric
Input”,” Character Display” and “Character Input”. If you want the current Character Input
component change to the Character Display component or Numeric component, you can modify
it here. It is highly efficient for the project modifying and maintaining.

• Browse Method

• Display Mode

139 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ ASCII

If it is checked, characters will be displayed in ASCII format. In this format, only ASCII
characters will be displayed, including numbers, symbols and English letters. Chinese characters
are not supported to display.

➢ Password

If it is checked, characters will be displayed in “*” mode.

➢ Unicode

If it is checked, characters will be displayed in UNICODE. In the UNICODE mode, each Chinese
character or English letter will occupy one character (two bytes).

➢ Swap the High byte and the Low byte

After the “ASCII” is checked, you can select the function “Swap the High byte and the Low
byte”.

• Read Address

➢ Reading And Writing Address Is Different

140 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The character input component is integrated with functions of reading data from an address
and writing data to an address. When the “Reading And Writing Address Is Different” is not
checked, the using method is same to the “Character Display” component. When the “Reading
And Writing Address Is Different” is checked, different address can be set in the “Read Address”
and in the “Write Address”.

➢ Use Address Tag

When this function is checked, variables in the address tag library can be directly linked by
the component (See address tag library details in:Detailed manual/Library/Address Tag Library).
141 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The address tag library can be used to improve the project maintaining efficiency. If many
components in the project are linked to a same variable in the address tag library and this address
need to be modified, it is only necessary to modify the variable address linked in the tag library
without modifying each component.

The character address setting includes the attributes : “Device”, “Address Type”, “Adress”,
“Format (Range)”, “Address Index”, and so on. Please see: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

4.6.3.4.2 Characters Setting

• Row Settings

Note:

If “Unicode” is not checked, each two ASCII characters or each one Chinese character
occupies one word register.

If “Unicode” is checked, each ASCII character or each Chinese Character occupies one word
register.

• Row Space settings

142 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

A dialog will pop up when you click the “Row Space Settings” button. You can set the
attributes such as “Horizontal scaling”, “Line space”, “Words space”, shadow color and shadow
deviation.

4.6.3.4.3 Keyboard Setting

See detailed setting in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/ Keyboard setting.

4.6.3.4.4 Data font

See detailed font setting in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/Font settings.

4.6.3.4.5 Control Settings

See detailed control setting in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/ Control
settings.

4.6.3.4.6 Display

See detailed display setting in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/ Display.

4.6.4 Toggle Switch and menu

143 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.4.1 Bit Switch

The “Bit Switch” is used to set the action, switch type and text display of the bit switch which
is used to change the bit state.

The “Bit Switch” component can be found on the tool bar or from the menu of Components.

144 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.4.1.1 General

See details for bit address setting in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Address editor/
Standard Bit Address Input.

4.6.4.1.2 Toggle Switch

On the page of “Toggle Switch”, you can set “Press” or “Release” for the action. And the
switch type can be “On”, “Off”, “Inverse” or “Reset”.

145 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Details for “Language” selection can be seen in:Detailed manual/Setup/System Settings/

Language Settings.

Details for “Import Favorite Font Template” can be seen in: Detailed manual/Setup/System
Settings/Favorite Font Template.

Details for “Text Library” can be seen in: Detailed manual/Library/Text Library.

Details for “Marquee” setting can be seen in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/
Marquee.

4.6.4.1.3 Graphics

Details for Graphics can be seen in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/ Graphic
edit.

4.6.4.1.4 Control Settings

146 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Details for control settings can be seen in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing
/Control settings.

4.6.4.1.5 Display

Details for display setting can be seen in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing
/Display.

4.6.4.2 Word Switch

The word switch is used to set the action and text display for word address states.

The “Word Switch” component can be found on the tool bar or from the menu of
Components.

147 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.4.2.1 General

148 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
See details for word address setting in: Detailed manual/General functions/Address
editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

4.6.4.2.2 Toggle Switch

On the page of “Toggle Switch”, the action can be set “Press” or “Release”. The switch type
can be set to “Add” or “Subtract”. if“Non-cyclic” is checked and the switch type is “And”, it will
stop adding when the result exceeds the maximum value. If “Non-cyclic” is not checked for the
“Add” switch type, it will start to shift again from the minimum value when the result reaches the
maximum value. The “Status” can be set directly or by the Up or Down arrows.

Details for “Language” selection can be seen in:Detailed manual/Setup/System Settings/

Language Settings.

Details for “Import Favorite Font Template” can be seen in: Detailed manual/Setup/System
Settings/Favorite Font Template.

Details for “Text Library” can be seen in: Detailed manual/Library/Text Library.

149 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Details for “Marquee” setting can be seen in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/
Marquee.

4.6.4.2.3 Graphics

Details for Graphics can be seen in: Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Graphic edit.

4.6.4.2.4 Control Settings

Details for control settings can be seen in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing
/Control settings.

4.6.4.2.5 Display

Details for display setting can be seen in: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing
/Display.

4.6.4.3 Check list and selection boxes

The component of “Check list and selection boxes” is used to operate “Word register”. The
preset value is written into the register and the preset text is displayed when the current
component is operated. The preset text corresponding to the status value which is equal to the
word register will display automatically. See the following description for details.

Click the menu command of the “Check list and selection boxes” component and open the
property TAB of this component.

4.6.4.3.1 General

150 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Browse Method

The “Browse Method” includes “Scrollbar” and “Screen”. You can select the “Scrollbar” or
the “Screen” or both ways to browse the content of the current component. The scrollbar width
can be freely set and the default width is 20. The “Screen” browse method is only effective for a
capacitive screen.

• Data Source

The default is “Component settings”. That means the data source is the word register.

• Reading And Writing Address Is Different

The default is not checked. That means the read address and the write address are same.
When it is checked, the “Read” register and the “Write” register can be set separately. The value
of the “Read” register will be compared with the preset value to determine the corresponding
text display. The preset value corresponding to the status selected will be written into the “Write”
register when the component is operated.

4.6.4.3.2 Selector Setting

151 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
On the page of “Selector Setting”, the attributes such as the number of items (“Item Count”),
the preset value of each item and the content to be displayed can be set.

• Item Count

The default is 6. The range is 1~255. That means there are 255 items at most.

• Line Spacing

The default is 5. That means the space between rows.

• Selected Color

You can modify the color of the item selected in operation. The default is blue.

• Background Color

It is the background color of the component excluding the scrollbar. The default is grey.

• Border Color

152 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
It is the frame color of the selecting list components excluding the rolling bar, and the default
is white.

• “Index”, “Correspond” and “Tag Content”

There is a table for the list components. It includes three columns: “Index”, “Correspond”
and “Tag Content”.

For example, the “Item Count” is set 5. The value of the “Index” is 0~5. Index 0~4 are
corresponding to effective items and item 5 is corresponding to the “Error” one.

The default value of the column “correspond” is equal to the value of the “Index” for the
effective items. When the number of items is set to 5, the content of the “correspond” for the
index 5 is “Other”. The “Other” means any value except “0~4”. The “correspond” value can be
modified. For example, the “correspond” value of index 0 is modified 100. That means the text of
index 0 in the “Tag Content” will be displayed if the value of the word register is equal to 100. And
meanwhile, if item 0 is selected, the value 100 will be written into the word register.

The default value of the column “Tag Content” is equal to the value of the “Index” for the
effective items. When any item is selected, the text required can be input to the corresponding
“Tag Content”.

153 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• Illegal input

The “Illegal input” means that the value of word address doesn't equal to any value of the
“correspond” for the effective items. The default is “Show Error Status”.

➢ Show Error Status

The component displays the “correspond” content of the “Error” item when illegal
input happened.
➢ Keep Current status
The component keeps the last correct status when illegal input happened.
• Error Notification

When it is checked, a “Bit register” can be set. The “Bit register” will be set to ON if any error
status appears.

• Enable Control Address

If it is checked, a “Word register” can be set. Each bit of the word register is corresponding
to an index. That is, bit 0 is corresponding to index 0, and bit 1 is corresponding to index 1, and so
on. When there are more than 16 items, the next word register will be occupied automatically.
When the corresponded bit of the word register is ON, the item of the corresponding index in the
list will be hidden. For example, when the word register value of the “Enable Control Address” is
set to 5, the bit 0 and bit 2 of this word register are both ON and the items of the index 0 and the
index 2 will be hidden.

154 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

In the figure above, when there is any wrong status, LB0 will be set to ON. When LW1=5,
index 0 and index 2 will be hidden.

Item 0 and item 2 are hidden.

Bit0 = 1, bit 2 = 1

4.6.4.4 The Drop-down List

The attributes of “The Drop-down list” are almost same to the attributes of “Check list and
selection box”. The main difference is that “The Drop-down list” is withdrawn when it is not
operated or after it is operated. The “Drop-down list” will be unfolded when it is clicked, and then
it can be viewed and operated by the scrollbar or by screen method.

155 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.4.4.1 General

The property TAB of “The Drop-down list” can be opened by clicking the command
“Component/ Toggle Switch and menu/ The Drop-down List” in the menu, see the figure below.

The figure above shows that the “General” property TAB is same to the “Check list and
selection boxes”, it is not introduced here, and details can be seen in Detailed
manual/Commponent/Toggle Switch and menu/Check list and selection boxes.

4.6.4.4.2 Selector Setting

Click the “Selector Setting” property TAB, it can be opened, see the figure below.

156 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

For “The Drop-down List” component, the most settings of the “Selector Setting” property
TAB are same to the “Check list and selection boxes”. The difference is that there is an additional
item of “Pop-up style” for the “The Drop-down List”.

The default is “Popup Downwards”. The “Pop-up upwards” is optional. And it can be set
according to the actual requirement. See the figure below.

Popup Downwards Popup Upwards

The figure below shows the situation when “The Drop-down List” and “Check list and
selection boxes” appear on the picture at the same time.

157 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Check list and selection boxes

The Drop-down List

The figure above shows that when the “The Drop-down List” completes operation or has no
operation, it is “withdrawn”. It will be unfolded only when it is operated, while the “Check list and
selection boxes” is always unfolded no matter it is in operation or not, and it can be directly viewed
and operated.

The other details can be seen in Detailed manual/Commponent/Toggle Switch and

menu/Check list and selection boxes.

4.6.4.5 File Browser Box

File Browser Box is used to display the file information of the internal and external
storage devices.

4.6.4.5.1 General

• Font Type

➢ Font Size

158 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Select the appropriate font size here.

➢ Colors

Select the font color by the tool ”or the color palette. When it is selected on
the touch screen, the background color of the font is in the inverse tone.

• Date Format

There are three optional date formats.

There are three optional separators provided among the day, the month and the year.

• Only Show the File with Designated Suffix.

The suffix is blank by default. It represents to display all. You can set the file type
you want.

As shown as above, if you add the “fpg” suffix by clicking the button “Add Items”,
only files with fpg suffix will be displayed in the browser box for easy filtering and
viewing. If you want to display all, click the button “Delete” and keep the browser box
blank.

159 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.4.5.2 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.4.6 User Privilege

4.6.4.6.1 General

• Browse Method

You can view by scroll bar or screen sliding, and screen sliding is only effective for
capacitive screen.

• Display The Table

➢ Language

You can switch between Chinese and English here, and then you can edit the text in
the below table in Chinese and in English separately.

160 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Display the Title Bar

Check this option “Display the Title Bar”, you can set the font of the title bar and the
list, see details in Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Font settings.

➢ Use Lable

Check this option, you can edit the “Title Bar Description” in the below
table.Uncheck it, you can edit the “Title Bar Description” by using text library.

161 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Use same font for table contents and title

This option will be displayed only when you check the option “Display the Title Bar”.
After checking this option, the font of the list will be consistent with the font of the title
bar. If you do not check it, you can edit the font of the list separately.

➢ Move UP and Down

You can adjust the arrangement of the displayed items by clicking the button “Move
Up” or “Down”.

➢ Restore to default

Restore the items to the initial arrangement.

162 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
➢ Row Spacing and Column Spacing

Adjust the row spacing by modifying the value of the edit box of “Row Spacing”. And
adjust the column spacing by modifying the value of the edit box of “Column Spacing”.

➢ Detailed Info

After check the option “Detailed Info”, you can select a trigger mode to pop up the
window such as “User privilege” for editing. The trigger mode can be set “Single Click” or
“Double Click”.

4.6.4.6.2 Table

You can set the appearance of the “User Privilege” component in the “Table”
property TAB. The appearance of this component is show as below.

The “Table” property TAB of the “User Privilege” component is shown as below.

163 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Table Background Color and Title Bar Background Color

You can change the background color of the “User Privilege” component. And you
can change the title bar background color, too.

• Outline Style, Split Line Style, Line Width and Line Color

You can change the type of the out line and the split line, the line width and the line
color.

164 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• Display Grid Line

After you check the option “Row Split Line” and the option “Column Split Line”, the
appearance of the “User Privilege” component is shown as below.

If the option “Row Split Line” and the option “Column Split Line” are unchecked, the
appearance is shown below.

4.6.4.6.3 Search

Check the option “Enable search”, and you can query the corresponding user
privilege.

165 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Search Trigger Bit

A bit register needs to be set here. When the value of the bit register is “1”, the
result of filtering by a range is displayed. When the value of the bit register is “0”, the
displayed result is not filtered.

• Search Register

You need to specify a starting address of a set continuous 8 word registers here.
You can input the corresponding user name to these registers to search. And the
inputted user name should be no more than 16 ACSII letters or 8 ACSII characters.

4.6.4.6.4 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.5 Timer and Data Transmission

4.6.5.1 Timer
166 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
You can use the timer component to accomplish the tasks that need to be
periodically executed or triggered under specific conditions.

The timer must be established on a window. When this window is working, the timer
will work in accordance with the rules set. If you don’t want the timer to be affected by
the window switching, you can establish a timer on the common window.

For adding a timer, there are three ways. The first way is clicking the timer
command from the “Component” menu. The second way is opening the property TAB of
the window, then click the “Timer” property TAB. And the third way is clicking the “Timer”
command from the shortcut tool bar.

167 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

In the“Timer” property TAB, click the button "Add", you can open the detailed
settings of the timer.

4.6.5.1.1 Trigger and Stop

• Timing and Execution

Set the operation mode of the timer in Timing and Execution.

➢ Execution Period
Set the execution cycle of the timer, in 0.1 S (seconds). If you want to set the execution
cycle in 10 seconds, you can set to 100×0.1S.

168 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
➢ Delay
In the case of unchecked “Delay” by default, when the trigger condition of the timer is
met, the timer will execute immediately for the first time. After an interval of the setting
execution cycle, the timer will execute for the second time until the end condition is met. If
you want the timer to delay execution for a period of time when the trigger condition is met,
you can check the “Delay” option, then delay time can be set to an integer times, such as
three execution cycles.
• Trigger conditions
Trigger conditions is used to trigger the execution of the timer. There are many ways
to trigger the timer in this software. You can choose according to your actual needs. It is
important to note that the timer trigger mode should be edge trigger. After the trigger
condition is met, the timer will continue working until the end condition is met.
➢ Bit

After select the “Bit” option, you can specify a bit register in the “Trigger Address” to
control the timer trigger. The “Trigger Mode” can be set “OFF→ON”, “ON→OFF”, or
“ON←→OFF”. For example, if you set “OFF→ON”, that means the timer is triggered
when the register value changes from 0 to 1.

The “Auto Reset” refers to that the register value is automatically changed to OFF
after the timer is triggered (for the “OFF→ON” trigger mode). The “ON ←→ OFF” trigger
mode does not have the “Auto Reset” option.

➢ Word

169 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
After selecting the “Word” option, you can specify a word register to control the timer
trigger. When the value of the specified register is changed, the timer execution will be
triggered.
➢ Condition

If you select “Condition” option, you can use a set of conditions to control the timer
trigger. For the logical condition editing, see: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Logic Control.

➢ Trigger when the window is open

When the window in which the timer is located is opened, the timer execution will be
directly triggered. Note that if the timer is located in the Public Window, only trigger once
when the user project is executed after powering on the HMI, and it will not be triggered
when switching to another window.
➢ Trigger when the window is closed

When the window in which the timer is located is closed and the other window is
opened, the timer execution is triggered.
• Condition for stop

170 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The condition for stop refers to the condition under which the timer stops execution.
It is same to the “Trigger Condition”. The condition for stop is also edge-triggered.

➢ Timer will stop when the window closed

The “Condition for stop” of the timer is “Timer will stop when the window closed” by
default. If you want to end the timer execution in advance, select the other condition for
stop:

➢ Stop when specified count value reached

You can use the condition for stop to make the timer end automatically after repeating
the specified number of times. Wherein, for the specified number of times, you can directly
enter it by Constant, or you can specify a word register to control the timer execution times
by Variable.
Note: When the trigger condition is "Trigger when the window is closed," the condition
for stop will be directly selected as the “Stop when specified count value reached” and the
number of times is set to 1 and not editable. This kind of timer can only be executed once.
➢ Condition Judgment

171 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

You can control the timer to end by using a set of conditions. When the conditions
are satisfied, the timer execution ends. For the logical condition editing, see: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Logic Control.

4.6.5.1.2 Timer Function

Click the "Timer Function" tab and open the “Timer Function” property TAB.

• Run Macro

You can use the timer to trigger the execution of macro instructions. If the macro
instruction hasn’t been established in the project, you can’t check this box. You need to

172 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
click the "Macro Code" to open the Macro Code Editor Window and add the macro code.
If the macro instruction is already exist, you can select the established macro from the
drop-down list. Click the "Edit" button, you can directly open the Macro Code Editor
Window to edit the currently selected macro instruction.

• Status Setting

The “Status Setting” function is used to set a bit register or set the value of a word
register.

Whether setting the bit register status or setting the word register value, you first
need to set the target address. For the address setting, refer to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Address editor.

173 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Bit Setting

The mode of the Bit Setting includes “Set ON”, “Set OFF” and “Periodic Inverse”.
The “Set ON” means that the bit is set ON when the timer is triggered and the bit
remains ON in each execution period. The rules of “Set OFF” are same to the “Set ON”.
The “Periodic Inverse” refers that when the timer is triggered, the bit is inverted and
continues to invert in each execution cycle. For example, the timer executed once per
second switches the LB0 bit. LB0 will change the state once per second, 1 second is ON
and 1 second is OFF.

➢ Word Setting

Word setting refers to periodic setting of a word register by timer. The setting modes
include “Add”, “Subtract” and “Constant”.
• Audio Play

For the HMI device with an audio output function, you can use the timer to play sound.
Click the "Audio Library", and select the audio file to be played from the “Audio Library”.
This software supports audio files in MP3 and WAV format. For adding audio files, please

refer to: Detailed manual/Library/Audio Library. Click the triangle play button at the
back of audio file, you can hear the audio file.
Note:

174 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “Run Macro”, “Status Setting” and “Audio Play” options can be checked at the
same time. The timer can simultaneously control the execution of the three. However the
execution order is uncertain.

4.6.5.2 Timing Data Transmission

A single or batch data can be transmitted by timing. The action can be triggered or
executes periodically. This component is similar to the timer. You need to add it to a
specified window. If you want a global execution, you can add it to the public window.

4.6.5.2.1 Trigger and Stop

The “Trigger and Stop” is used to control the execution modes of components. The
modes of “Trigger and Stop” include “Execution Period”, “Trigger Condition” and
“Condition for stop”. The details can be refers to: Detailed manual/Component/Timer and
Data Transmissionn/Timer.

4.6.5.2.2 Data Transmission

Data transmission can set the data to be transmitted, including the type and the
length of the data to be transmitted, source address and target, and so on.

4.6.5.2.3 Notification

Notification function is similar to the notification function in the “Control Setting”

property TAB of some components. It is used for before-writing notification and after-
writing notification. For the detailed settings, refer to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Control settings.

175 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.6 Barand Meter

4.6.6.1 Bar Chart

Apart from the slight difference of “Direction” as shown in the figure below, the other
functions of the bar graph are the same as the Sector Chart. The detailed description is
referred to: Detailed manual/Component/Bar and Meter/Sector Chart.

4.6.6.2 SectorChart

Add a Sector Chart component by clicking the menu command “Component/Bar and
Meter”. It is shown as below.

You can add the Sector Chart by clicking the corresponding shortcut button. It is
shown as below.

176 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.6.2.1 General

• Direction
The option “Direction” is used to set the starting point direction which refers to the fill
direction of the sector chart.

As shown below, the left Sector Chart is filled by Clockwise, and the right Sector
Chart is filled by Anti-clockwise.

177 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Clockwise Anti-clockwise

• Angle
The “Inside and outside ring ratio (%)” is set to a percentage of the inner ring radius
to the outer ring radius. The “Start Angle” of the sector chart can be set at will. The effect
is shown as below.

• Type
The types of the sector chart include “Standard” and “Deviation Type”. The filling origin
position of the standard sector chart is not adjustable. The origin position of the deviation
type is adjustable. Here introduces the usage of bias type pie chart.
As shown as below, after selecting the Deviation Type, the “Origin Pos.” can be freely
set.

178 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The running effects of the “Deviation Type” and the “Standard” are contrasted as
shown as below (the left is deviation type, the right is standard type).

• Read Address
The detailed information is referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Address
editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

4.6.6.2.2 Extended

• Border Color and Background Color

As shown as below, the border color and the background color of the sector chart can be set
freely. If the “Border Color” and “Background Color” are not checked,the border and the
background color are not visible. The sector chart has three Fill Types: “Solid Color”, “Pattern” and
“Gradient”. The Bar Color can be set freely.

179 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• Alarm Limit
As shown as below, you can set the upper and lower limit for alarm. Except for the
“Blink” function, other functions are same to the “Meter". The detailed settings are
referred to: Detailed manual/Component/Bar and Meter/Meter.

• Mark Target Area

When the value enters into the specified Mark Target Area, the color of sector chart
will be changed to the Target Area Color. The Target Value and Error Range can be set
by Constant or by Variable.

The running results are as shown in the figure below. In this case, the Target Area
Color is set yellow.

180 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.6.2.3 Scale and Mark

• Display the percentage

The function is used to display the total percentage of filling part to the entire sector
chart. As shown as below, the display font size, font style and font color can be set
freely.

• Display Scale
The “Display scale” usage of the Sector Chart is same tothe Meter but a slightly
different, as shown as below. The detailed usage is referred to: Detailed
manual/Component/Bar and Meter/Meter.

4.6.6.2.4 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.6.3 Meter

181 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
As shown as below, the Meter component can be added by clicking the menu
command “Component/Bar and Meter”.

You can add a Meter component by clicking the corresponding tool button in the
shortcut tool bar. It is shown as below.

4.6.6.3.1 General

182 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Meter Plate
As shown as below, the Meter Plate includes five types: “Round (Hands Up)”,
“Round (Hands down)”, “Upper Semi-Circle”, “Lower Semi-circle” and “Arc (Set
Automatically)”.

The attributes of the “Round (Hands Up)”, “Round (Hands down)”, “Upper Semi-Circle”
and “Lower Semi-circle” are same. For the Arc Meter Plate, you can freely set the starting
angle and ending angle, as shown as below.

183 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Read Address

For details of Read Address, see: Detailed manual/General functions/Address

editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

• Maximum Minimum Value

The Maximum Value and the Minimum Value of the Meter can be set by Constant or
by Variable.

If you select by Constant, a fixed constant can be set in the position shown in the
figure below.

184 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

If you select by Variable, you can specify a word register and enter a value to the word
register to change meter during running your project, as shown in the figure below.

• Display Range Scale

Set the upper and lower limit for alarm on the position shown in the figure below. The
limit value can be set by Constant or by Variable. After setting the upper and lower limit
value, you can also set the colors for value within limit, below lower limit and above upper
limit, as shown below.

185 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.6.3.2 Watch Hand and Scale

• Color and Size

As shown in the figure below, the color of the Watch Hand and Watch Hand Axis, the
length and width of the Watch Hand, and the radius of the Watch Hand Axis can be set.

• Display Scale
As shown as the figure below, you can modify the color, the width and type of the
meter scale line after the “Display Scale” is checked.

➢ Line

186 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Scale

You can set the “Main Scale Division Number”, the “Main Scale Length” and the
“Sub Scale Length” here. The Location of the scale can be set “Inside”, “Outside” and
“Center”, as shown as below. The “Sub Scale Division Number” and the “Axis” are
checked by default. The default sub scale division number is 2. If the “Sub Scale Division
Number” and the “Axis” are unchecked, that means the sub scale and axis are not
displayed.

If the “Mark” is not checked, the meter will not display the scale value. After the “Mark”
is checked, you can set the number of the integer digits and the decimal digits of the scale
value and also can set the font styles of scale value. If you select the "Reverse scale order",
then the maximum value and the minimum value will switch their positions.

• Watch Hand Style

Click the button “Watch Hand Style”, you can select a style of watch hand for the
meter.

187 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.6.3.3 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.7 Curve Graphs

4.6.7.1 Trend Curve

The “Trend Graph” component is a curve formed by the sampling data.

4.6.7.1.1 General

188 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• Display Points of Each HMI

This option means the number of the displayed sampling data points on the screen.
The default is 10.The max number of points can not more than the width of the used HMI
resolution. For example, the 7-inch HMI device with the resolution 800*480 is used. Then
the max number of points is 799.

• Direction

The option “Direction” is used to set the display direction of the trend curve. It is set
"Horizontal" by default. It can be set "Vertical", too.

• Pause

A bit register address can be set here. When the bit register is ON, the trend curve
is not refreshed (but the sampling is not paused). When it is OFF, the trend curve is
refreshed in real time.

• Time range per screen

You can set the time axis range, there are constants and variables optional,
variables are controlled through the register, maximum time can be set as1440 minutes.

• Browse Method

The methods of "Scrollbar" and "Slide" are all supported to view the trend curve.
You can check anyone or two. But the "Slide" is only valid for the capacitive HMI device.

• Use Cursor

You can check the option “Use Cursor”. This option is used to view the trend data
crossed by the cursor and the data sampling time. The settings are shown as below.

➢ Display/Hide the Cursor

189 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Here you can set a bit register. If the bit register is ON, the cursor is displayed. If it is
OFF, the cursor is hidden. When the cursor is visible, you can click or slide to move the
cursor.

➢ Cursor Color

The default color of the cursor is red. You can modify it according to the actual
needs.

➢ Cursor Data Area

You need to set a starting address of a continuous word registers area here to save
the information of the cursor data. The first 7 word registers save the sampling time of the
trend data which is crossed by the cursor. They are year, month, day, hour, minute, second
and millisecond. From the eighth register, the sampling data crossed by the cursor is saved.
The data format should be consistent with which defined in "Data Sampling".
For example, the starting address of the cursor data area is set LW100. Then the
registers from LW100 to LW106 save the sampling time information of year, month, day,
hour, minute, second and millisecond. If the "Data Sampling" that you use only defines a
data in "16-bit Unsigned" data type and the channel number is 1, then the LW107 register
saves the sampled data at this time. If the "Data Sampling" that you use has the data
sampled from two channels, the data type of the first channel is "Single precision floating
point number" and the second channel is "16-bit Unsigned", then LW107 (Single precision
floating point number) saves the data of the first channel and LW109 (16-bit Unsigned)
saves the data of the second channel. Other data formats can be done in the same matter.

• Use Zoom

This option is optional. After it is checked, the option "Two-point Touch Zooming (only
for multi-touch hardware)" can be check. This option is only valid for the capacitive HMI
device. After you enable this function, the curve will be zoomed out when two fingers slide
outward in the curve zone and the curve will be zoomed in when two fingers slide inward
in the curve zone.
The option "Register Control Zooming" is used to zoom by using a word register. After
check it, a word register needs to be given here. The value of this word register is the
percentage of zooming. For example, the value of the word register is 50. It means that
only 50% is displayed and the curve is scaled a half. If the value of the word register is
200, it means 200% is displayed and the curve is zoomed to 2 times. The settings are
shown as below.

190 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.7.1.2 Channel

In the “Channel” property TAB, you need select a sampling data as the “Data Source”.
There will be a red exclamation mark here if the "Data Sampling" is not set. You can open
the "Data Sampling" settings page to set the required sampling data by click the button

“ ”. After the setting is complete, the "Channel" page is shown as below.

191 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

After you selecting a sampling data for the option "Data Source", all channels of this
sampling data defined in the "Data Sampling" will be displayed in the “Channel Setting”
property box.
For the above figure, the sampling data “Temperature Humidity” is selected as the
data source. This sampling data has two channels. The data of channel 1 is from LW0
register and the data type is “Single precision floating point number”. The data of channel
2 is from LW2 register and the data type is "16-bit Unsigned".

• Data Source Information

In this area, you can see the various attributes of the selected sampling data defined
in the "Data Sampling".

There is an option “Hide Channel Register” here. After it is checked, you need to
specify a word register. When the bit0 of this word register is ON, hide the curve of Channel
1. When the bit1 is ON, hide the curve of Channel 2. Other channels can be done in the
same matter. The setting is shown as below.

192 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

For example, the option “Hide Channel Register” is set LW500. Then the curve of
Channel 1 is hidden when the bit 0 of the LW500 is ON. The curve of Channel 2 is
hidden when the bit1 of the LW500 is ON.

• Channel Setting

All channels of the data source are displayed here. They are all checked in the
“Use” Column by default. It means they are all set to display on the trend curve.

Note:

If one channel is not checked in the "Use" column, that means the data of this channel
will not be displayed on the trend curve. So the corresponding bit of the word register
specified in the option “Hide Channel Register" cannot control the curve of this channel to
display or hide.
Click one channel in the "Channel Setting" area, the relevant attribute settings of this
channel will be displayed below. It is shown as below.

193 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Dot Mark

This option is not checked by default. After it is checked, you can set the dot color,
the dot size and the dot style for each point of the sampling data.

➢ Drawing Connecting Line

This option is checked by default. If it is checked, you can set the line color, the line
width and the line type for the connecting line of the sampling data points.

➢ Projection along X-axis Direction

This option is not checked by default. After it is checked, the trend curve from the
first point to the current sampling point will project to the X-axis to form a closed figure.

For example, the option “Dot Mark” and the option “Projection along X-axis
Direction” are all checked, the display effect is shown as below.

194 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Minimum Value

The minimum value of the trend curve can be set by Constant or by Variable. When
set it by Variable, the data type of the specified word register should be consistent with
the data type of the selected sampling data channel.

➢ Maximum Value

The maximum value of the trend curve can be set by Constant or by Variable. When
set it by Variable, the data type of the specified word register should be consistent with
the data type of the selected sampling data channel.

4.6.7.1.3 Search

The option “Enable Search Function” is not checked by default in the “Search”
property TAB. After it is checked, the settings are shown as below.

195 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

There are three fixed search modes supported: “Search By Date”, “Search By Time
Range” and “Search By Sequence”. The “Register Query Mode” is a dynamic search
mode. The default search mode is “Search By Date”.

➢ Search By Date
The settings of “Search By Date” are shown as below.

“Search Trigger Bit”

The option “Search Trigger Bit” is used to specify a bit register to trigger the search
function. When the trigger bit is ON, the filtered results are displayed. When the trigger
bit is OFF, the result which is not filtered is displayed.

“Search Register”

The “Search Register” is used to specify word registers to save the information of
the search function. The number of the word registers is depending on the search mode.

196 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
You can get the information of the used word registers according to the text displayed
under the specified address.

For example, select the “Search By Date” mode and specify LW300 for the option
“Search Register”. Then LW300 saves the search year, LW301 saves the search month
and LW302 saves the search day. You can use three numeric value input components
connected with the three word registers to give the search conditions in your project.

➢ Search By Time Range

For the “Search By Time Range” mode, the function and the setting of the "Search
Trigger Bit" are same to the “Search By Date” mode. The difference is the "Search
Register."

When selecting the "Search By Time Range" mode, you should specify a start
address of a continuous 12 word registers area for the option “Search Register”. The first
six word registers save the start date of search, including year, month, day, hour, minute
and second. The last six word registers save the stop date of search. The setting is shown
as below.

➢ Search By Sequence

For the “Search By Sequence” mode, the function and the setting of the "Search
Trigger Bit" are same to the “Search By Date” mode. The difference is the "Search
Register."

For example, select the “Search By Sequence” mode and specify LW300 for the
option “Search Register”. The settings are shown as below. Then when LW300 is 0, the
data of the current day is displayed on the curve. When LW300 is 1, the data of the
yesterday is displayed on the curve. Other values can be done in the same matter.

197 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Register Query Mode

The “Register Query Mode” is a dynamic search mode. When the “Register Query
Mode” is selected, you can specify a word register to dynamically adjust the search
mode. If the word register is 0, the “Search By Date” mode will be used. If it is 1, the
“Search By Time Range” mode will be used. If it is 2, the “Search By Sequence” mode
will be used. The settings are shown as below.

4.6.7.1.4 Scale

• X-axis Scale

The source of X-axis value can be set “Use Point Scale Value” or “Use Time Scale
Value”. The default is “Use Point Scale Value”. It is shown as below.

The option “Use Point Scale Value” means that the values of the sampling data
points are used as the X-axis scale. The option "Use Time Scale Value" means that the
time of the data sampling is used as the X-axis scale.

198 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• X-axis Scale

The source of Y-axis value can be set “Use ... Channel Maximum Minimum Value”
or “Self-setting”. The default is “Use 1 Channel Maximum Minimum Value”. It is shown as
below.

After you select the option “Use ... Channel Maximum Minimum Value”, you can
specify a channel number. And the minimum and the maximum values of this channel will
be used as the minimum and the maximum values of the Y axis.
If the option "Self-setting" is selected, you can set the maximum and minimum values
by yourself as the source of Y-axis. The minimum and maximum values can be set by
Constant or by Variable. The settings are shown as below.

199 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
For more details, please refer to: Detailed manual/Component/Scale.

4.6.7.1.5 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.7.2 XY Chart

The “XY Chart” refers to the curve formed by the corresponding data points which are
comprised by a set of data registers or two different sets of data registers. All settings are
described below.

4.6.7.2.1 General

• Refresh Mode

The “Refresh Mode” includes two types: "Cyclic" and "Triggered".

➢ Cyclic

The default refresh mode is "Cyclic". The default sampling cycle period is 1 second.
That means the curve is refreshed every 1 second. The minimum sampling cycle period
is 0.1 second.

➢ Triggered

After you select "Triggered" refresh mode, you need to specify a bit register and select
the “Trigger Mode”. The Trigger Mode can be set "Bit" or "Word".
200 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
For the “Bit” trigger mode, there are three “Trigger Condition”: "OFF→ ON",
"ON→OFF" and "OFF↔ON". You can choose one of them. The settings are shown as
below.

For example, if the trigger condition is set "OFF→ ON", that means the XY curve will
be refreshed when the specified bit register is changed from OFF to ON.

There is an option “Auto Reset” for the trigger condition "OFF→ ON" and
“ON→OFF”. If you check it, the bit register state will be reset after it is changed.

For the “Word” trigger mode, the details are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Logical Control.

• Data Point

The default value is 10. The range is from 2 to 4096. The option “Data Point” can be
set byConstant or by Variable.

• Control Setting

➢ Pause control

If you check this option, a bit register needs to be specified to control the Pause
function. When the bit register is ON, the XY chart is paused and not be refreshed.

201 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
➢ Clear control

If you check this option, a bit register needs to be specified to control the Clear
function. When the bit register is ON, the data of the current XY chart is cleared.

• Use Cursor

After this option is checked, some parameters need to be set. The settings are
shown as below.

➢ Display/Hide the cursor

Same to the Trend Curve, a bit register needs to be specified to control the cursor
display or hide.

➢ Cursor Color

The cursor color is set here.

➢ Cursor Data address

Similarly, you need to set a starting address of a continuous word registers area here
to save the coordinate data information of which the cursor is crossed with the XY chart.
The data type is depended on the setting in the "Channel" property TAB. For example, the
data type is set "16-bit Unsigned in the "Channel" property TAB and the first starting
register address is set LW100, then the data of the cursor (X, Y) is (LW100, LW101). If the

202 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
data type is "Single-precision Floating-point Number", then the data of the cursor (X, Y) is
(LW100, LW102). Other data types can be done in the same matter.

4.6.7.2.2 Channel

The “Channel” property TAB is shown as below.

• Channel Number

The default value of the “Channel Number” is 1. The XY chart can display up to 16
channels simultaneously.

• Channel Settings

You can define the channel information in the “Channel Settings” table: the X
address and the Y address are continuous by default. As shown as above, the default
starting X address is LW0 and the default starting Y address is LW1. They are
continuous. If you check the box in front of the Y address, the Y address can be not
continuous with the X address. For example, you can set the starting Y address LW100.

➢ Type

Select the data type for the current channel according to the actual needs.

203 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
➢ Remark

You can note the name of the curve for the current channel in the “Remark” column.
For example, channel 1 is noted as "Disc A track".

Same as the Trend Curve, selecta channel in the “Channel Settings” table, there are
many parameters can be set for the selected channel in the following "Channel Setting".
The most parameters are same to the settings of the Trend Curve. The option “Projection
along Y-axis Direction” is added here. The meaning of this option is same to the "Projection
along X-axis Direction" but the direction is different. The Minimum Value and the Maximum
Value of the Y-axis can be set different with X-axis. They can be set by Constant or by
Variable. The default range of the Minimum Value and the Maximum Values from 0 to 100.
The detailed settings can be referred to the "Channel" property TAB of the Trend Curve.
For the information of the occupied addresses by the current channel, it is depended
on the data type of this channel. You can view the text which is noted below the “Channel
Setting”. It is shown as below.

4.6.7.2.3 Scale

Refer to the "Scale" property TAB of Trend Curve.

4.6.7.2.4 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

204 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.7.3 Data Group Chart Display

The “Data Group Chart Display” component is a curve comprising of a set data of
specified continuous registers.

4.6.7.3.1 General

• Each screen sampling points

The default value of this option is 10. The minimum value is 2 and the maximum
value is less than the width of the used screen resolution. For example, the used screen
resolution is 800*480, and then the maximum value of samples per screen is 799.

• Direction

The “Direction” option is set "Left To Right" by default. You can set it "Up To Down"
too. They are corresponding to the "Horizontal" and "Vertical" display modes.

The settings of these parameters such as the “Browse Method”, the "Control Setting",
the "Refresh Mode" and the "Use Zoom" are same to the "XY Chart". The details can be
referred to the settings in the “General” property TAB of XY Chart.

• Use Cursor

It is not checked by default. After check it, the parameters are shown as below.

205 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The settings of these options are same to the Trend Curve or the XY Chart, such as
the “Display/Hide the Cursor” and the “Cursor Color”.

• Cursor Data Area

Similarly, you can set a "Word Register" as the starting address of the continuous
registers here. The first two word registers are used to save the point number where the
cursor stays. The registers from the specified register address + 2 are used to save the
data of which the cursor is crossed with the XY chart.
As shown as above, the starting register is set LW0, and then LW0 and LW1 save the
point number where the cursor stays. If there are three channels for the XY chart, the data
type of the Channel 1 is "16-bit Unsigned", the second channel is "Single-precision
Floating-point Number", the third channel is "32-bit Unsigned", then LW2 (16-bit Unsigned
number) save the Channel 1 data, LW3 (Single-precision Floating-point Number) save the
Channel 2 data, LW5 (32-bit Unsigned) save the Channel 3 data. Other channels can be
done in the same matter.

4.6.7.3.2 Channel

206 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Channel No.

There is 1 channel by default. A “Data Group Chart Display” component can display
up to 16 channels.

• From the Start Address, the Sampling Address is Continuous.

This option is checked by default. If the register of the “Sampling No.” for channel 1
in the “Channel Setting” table is set "LW100" and the “Data Type” is "16-bit Unsigned",
then LW101 is used to save the first sample data, LW102 is used to save the second,
and so on. If the “Data Type” is set "32-bit Unsigned", then LW101 (32-bit Unsigned)
saves the first sample data, LW103 (32-bit Unsigned) saves the second sample data.
Other data types can be done in the same matter.

If you don’t check the option "From the Start Address, the Sampling Address is
Continuous.", it means the “Start Address” of the registers to save the sample data can
be set independently. The settings are shown as below.

207 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The below parameters setting for the selected channel is same to the Trend Curve or
the XY Chart. Please refer to the settings in the “Channel” property TAB of the Trend
Graph or XY Curve.

4.6.7.3.3 Scale

Refer to the settings in the “Scale” property TAB of the Trend Curve.

4.6.7.3.4 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.8 Scale
The "Scale" includes four types: “Horizontal Scale”, “Vertical Scale”, “Arc Scale” and
“Round Scale”. You can add a Scale component by clicking the menu command or by
using the shortcut tools bar.

208 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The “Horizontal Scale” is mainly used to display a progress bar. The “Vertical Scale”
can be used to display the current liquid level of a tank or the charge state of a battery.
The “Arc Scale” can display the value of a fuel meter, a speed meter, and other display
devices. The “Round Scale” can display the revolution speed, the angle and other
parameters.

4.6.8.1 General

4.6.8.1.1 Horizontal Scale

First, the option “Horizontal” is selected. Then you can do other settings for the
Horizontal Scale component.

209 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Line

You can set the line color, the line width and the line type to meet the needs of your
project.

• Scale

➢ Main Scale Bisection

Subdivide the scale in the scale range.

➢ Sub Scale Division Number

The main scale is subdivided singly. The option “Sub Scale Length” can be set to
make difference with the main scale.

210 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Mark

The option “Mark is used to set the value of the main scale.

The option “Integer” refers to the number of the decimal integer digits. The option
“Decimal” refers to the number of the decimal fraction digits.

You can set the font size, the font color and the font type for the main scale here.

The options “Min Value” and “Max Value” are used to set the range of the main
scale.

The options “Min Value” and “Max Value” can be set by Constant or by Variable. If
you set them by Variable and specify word registers for them, you can change the range
of the main scale by modifying the value of the specified word registers.

211 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Usually, the scale value is displayed increasing from left to right. Sometimes, it
needs to be displayed increasing from right to left. To do that, you should check the
option “Scale Is Reverse”.

➢ Axis

You can check the option “Axis” to display the axis of the scale. The position of the
axis can be set “Up”, “Down” or “Center”. Of course, you can remove the check to hide
the axis of the scale.

4.6.8.1.2 Vertical Scale

For the “Vertical Scale”, the only difference with the “Horizontal Scale” is the option
“Position” in the “Scale” property box. It is shown as below.

212 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.8.1.3 Arc Scale

For the “Arc Scale”, there are three differences with the “Horizontal Scale”. The
options “Starting Angle” and “End Angle” are added in the “Angle” property box. The
option “Main Scale Length” is added in the “Scale” property box. The option “Position” in
the “Scale” property box is different.

The option “Main Scale Length” is shown as below.

The start angle and the end angle can be set for the arc scale in the “Angle”
property box. The settings and the effect are shown as below.

213 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

For the option “Position” in the “Scale” property box, the axis position of the scale
can set “In”, “Out” and “Center”.

4.6.8.1.4 Round Scale

For the “Round Scale”, the only difference with the “Arc Scale” is that there is not
“Angle” settings. It is shown as below.

214 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The settings of the “Position” for the Scale component are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Position.

4.6.8.2Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.9 Table
The "Table" component is used largely in the project. There are two types: “Fixed-
width Table” and “Fixed-height Table”. You can add a Table component by clicking the
menu command “Component/Table/Fixed-width Table” or ““Component/ Table/ Fixed-
height Table”. Of course, you can add it by using the shortcut tools bar.

For the fixed-width table, the width of the cells is same and the height of the cells is
equal. It is shown as below.

215 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

For the fixed-height table, the width and the height of the cells can be modified by
mouse-dragging the split line. It is shown as below.

4.6.9.1 General

The “General” property TAB of the “Fixed-width Table” is shown as below.

The “General” property TAB of the “Fixed-height Table” is shown as below.

216 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The difference with the “Fixed-width Table” is that the options “Equal Height” and
“Equal Width” are not checked. Of course, you can check them and make the Fixed-
height Table switch to the Fixed-width Table.

• Position

The option “Position” in the “General” property TAB is referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Position.

• Appearance settings

The background color, the outline color, the split line color, the outline type, the split
line type, the outline width and the split line width can be set for the table component
appearance according to your needs and the project configuration.

217 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The option “Row Count” and the option “Column No.” are used to set the number of
the rows and the columns of the table. The option “Equal Height” and the option “Equal
Width” can be checked. If they are all checked, the table will be a fixed-width table.

The option “Hide Horizontal Split Line” and the option “Hide Vertical Split Line” can be
checked. You can check anyone or two to hide the split line of the table according to your
needs
For example, only check the option “Hide Vertical Split Line”. It is shown as below.

• Select

In the “General” property TAB, if you check the option “Select”, the “Control
Settings” property TAB will display.

218 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Select Mode and Select Color

After checking the option “Select”, you can set the color of the row/column/cell which
is selected during running the project. The option “Select Mode” can be set “Select by
Row”, “Select by Column” or “Select by Cell”. It determines that the selected is a row, a
column or a cell.

➢ Grid Position

For the option “Grid Position”, you need to give a word register to record the
selected row number if the select mode is “Select by Row”. The first row number is 0.

You need to give a word register to record the selected column number if the select
mode is “Select by Column”. The first column number is 0.

219 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The effect of the “Select by Row” mode is shown as below.

The effect of the “Select by Column” mode is shown as below.

When selecting the mode “Select by Cell”, two continuous word registers are
occupied. You need to give the first address of the two word registers here. The first
word register records the selected row number and the second records the selected
column number. The first row number and the first column number are 0.

220 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The effect of the “Select by Cell” mode is shown as below.

4.6.9.2 Control Settings

The settings of the “Control Settings” property TAB are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Control settings.

4.6.9.3 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.10 Slider
The "Slider" component can change the value of the specified word register by
pressing and moving the slider block.

4.6.10.1 General

221 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Minimum Value

The option “Minimum Value” refers to the minimum value of the slider. It can be set
by a constant or by a variable. When use a variable to set, the details are referred to:
Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

• Maximum Value

The option “Maximum Value” refers to the maximum value of the slider. It can be set
by a constant or by a variable. When use a variable to set, the details are referred to:
Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

• Read and Write Address

222 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
You should specify a word register to change the value for the slider component.
The word register input method is referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

• Direction

The option “Direction” is used to set the display direction of the slider. It can be set
“Display Upward”, “Display Downward”, “Display Leftward” and “Display Rightward”,.

• Min Scale

The “Min Scale” refers to the step of the slider block.

• Increase

The option “Increase” is used to set the minimum increase or decrease per each
click. It should set multiple of the “Min Scale”.If this option is not checked, it is set the
value of the “Min Scale” by default.

• Writing value change simultaneously while sliding

After this option is checked, the word register which is set in the option “Read and
Write Address” will change in real time during sliding the slider component. If it is not
checked, the value of the word register will change after the slider block is released.

4.6.10.2 Scale

The settings of the “Scale” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/
Component/ Scale.

4.6.10.3 Background Graphics

The settings of the “Background Graphics” property TAB are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Graphic edit.

4.6.10.4 Slider Graphics

223 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The settings of the “Slider Graphics” property TAB are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Graphic edit.

4.6.10.5 Dynamic Graphics

The settings of the “Dynamic Graphics” property TAB are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Dynamic Graphics.

4.6.10.6 Control Settings

The settings of the “Control Settings” property TAB are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Control settings.

4.6.10.7 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.11 Moving Component

You can click the menu command “Component/Moving Component/Moving
Component” to add a moving component in your project.

4.6.11.1 General

The option “Move in X-Axis Direction” refers to moving along the horizontal direction.
The option “Move in Y-Axis Direction” refers to moving along the vertical direction. These
two options can be checked together. That means moving in an oblique line direction.
The angle of the oblique line can be computed based on the moving distance along the
x-axis and along the y-axis.

224 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.11.1.1 Move in X-Axis Direction

• Read Address

For this option, you should set a word register to specify the moving distance of the
moving component along the x-axis. The standard word address input method is referred
to: Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

• Screen Moving Range

After check this option, you should set the upper limit and lower limit of the moving
range on the screen.

➢ Axis Lower Limit

The option “Axis Lower Limit” refers to the minimum value of x-axis for the moving
range. It can be a constant or a variable. When it is a variable, the details are referred to:
Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

➢ Axis Upper Limit

The option “Axis Upper Limit” refers to the maximum value of x-axis for the moving
range. It can be a constant or a variable. When it is a variable, the details are referred to:
Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

• Move Proportionally

After check this option, the moving component will move according to the proportion
that the “Input Lower Limit” is corresponding to the “Axis Lower Limit” and the “Input Upper
Limit” is corresponding to the “Axis Upper Limit”.
For example, the “Axis Lower Limit” is 0, the “Axis Upper Limit” is 799, the “Input
Lower Limit” is 0, and the “Input Upper Limit” is 7990. When the value of the specified
word register is 0, the position is corresponding to the x coordinate: 0.When the value of
the specified word register is 7990, it is corresponding to the x coordinate: 799.

• Inversely Proportional

This option can be checked when the option “Move Proportionally” is checked. After
it is checked, the “Input Lower Limit” is corresponding to the “Axis Upper Limit” and the
“Input Upper Limit” is corresponding to the “Axis Lower Limit”. The moving component
will move in a inverse proportion.

4.6.11.1.2 Move in Y-Axis Direction

225 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The settings of the “Move in Y-Axis Direction” are same to the “Move in X-Axis
Direction”. But the moving component is along the vertical direction.

4.6.11.2 Indicator Light

Display a picture or a text according to the status of the specified address.

The settings of the “Indicator Light” property TAB are referred to: Detailed
manual/Component/Indicator Light.

4.6.11.3 Label

The settings of the “Label” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Label.

4.6.11.4 Graphics

The settings of the “Graphics” property TAB are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Graphic edit.

4.6.11.5 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.12 Window

4.6.12.1 Bit Control Window

You can click the menu command “Component/Window/Bit Control Window” to add
a bit control window component in your project.

226 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.12.1.1 General

The “Bit Control Window” component is similar to the “Word Control Window”
component. The differences with the “Word Control Window” component are pointed out
as below. The other details are referred to: Detailed manual/Component/Window/Word
Control Window.

• Bit register triggers the pop-up of window

The option “Trigger Bit” is used to specify a bit register to trigger a popup window.
The popup window is determined by the option “Popup Window ID No.”. If you select the
option “Popup On”, the window will popup when the bit register is ON. If you select the
option “Popup Off”, the window will popup when the bit register is OFF.

For example, a button named “Popup the window” is connected with LB0 and the
trigger bit of the popup window component is set LB0. The simulation running result is
shown as below. When press the button “Popup the window”, the specified window will
pop up.

227 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Use Variable Window ID number

The function of “Use Variable Window ID number” is used to dynamically specify a
pop-up window by using a word register.

For the above example, the word register is specified LW0 and a numeric value input
component is connected with LW0. The simulation running result is shown as below. Enter
the corresponding window ID number in the numeric value input component and then click
the button “Popup the window”, the designated window will pop up.

228 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.12.1.2 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.12.2 Word Control Window

You can click the menu command “Component/Window/Word Control Window” to

add a word control window component in your project.

4.6.12.2.1 General

229 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Word register control the pop-up window

For the option “Popup Window ID”, a word register needs to be given to specify the
ID number of the popup window.

For example, add a word control window component and a numeric value input
component in your project. The word register controlling the pop-up window is set LW0
and it is also connected with the numeric value input component. It is shown as below.

230 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The simulation running result is shown as below. When input a positive integer value
to the numeric value input component, the window which the ID number of it is equal to
the inputted value will pop up.

• With Window Control Bar

After checking the option “With Window Control Bar”, you can add the window title
by checking the option “Title” and add the window close button by checking the option
“Close Button”. The font of the window title can be set by clicking the button “Set Title”.
The details are referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Font settings.

231 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
After set the window control bar, the simulation running result is shown as below.

• Variable pop-up window position

After check the option “Variable pop-up window position”, a first address of
continuous two word registers needs to be given to specify the X and Y coordinates of
the pop-up window.

For the above example, check the option "Variable pop-up window position" and the
first word register address of the window position control is set LW2.Then add two
numeric value input components in your project for inputting the X and Y coordinates of
the pop-up window. They are connected with LW2 and LW3 separately.

The simulation running result is shown as below. When change the values of the
numeric value input components, the position of the popup window will change.

232 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Variable window size

If you check the option “Variable window size”, a first address of continuous two
word registers needs to be given to specify the width and height of the popup window.

For the above example, check the option "Variable window size" and the first word
register address of the window size control is set LW4.Then add two numeric value input
components in your project for inputting the width and height of the pop-up window. They
are connected with LW4 and LW5 separately.

The simulation running result is shown as below. When change the values of the
numeric value input components, the size of the popup window will change.

233 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.12.2.2 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.13 List

4.6.13.1 Alarm and Event Display

4.6.13.1.1 Current Alarm and Event

The “Current Alarm and Event” function is to display the current triggered alarms
and events in a tabular form. Only the trigger state is displayed.

• General
The general properties of the “Current Alarm and Event” are basically the same to
the "Alarming and Event History". Please refer to: Detailed
manual/Component/List/Alarm and Event History.

234 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Note:

The differences with the "Alarming and Event History" are shown as below.

➢ The "Current Alarm and Event" includes “Count of Alarming Events”. But
the "Alarming and Event History" does not include it.
➢ The "Current Alarm and Event" only displays the trigger status. It does not
confirm and restore the status. So the gray color options in the table can not be
checked.

• Table
The settings of “Table” property TAB is referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Table drawing.

• Display
The settings of “Display” property TAB is referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

235 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.13.1.2 Alarming and Event History

The “Alarming and Event History” function is to display all alarms entries in tabular
form, including the current and historical alarms and events.

• General
➢ Show Group
You can select some groups of alarms and events to display in the alarm list.

Note:

The alarms and events can be grouped when they are created. The range of groups
is from 1 to 32. The alarm and event content can be set by clicking the button “Alarm and
Events Login” or by double-clicking the “System Settings/Alarm and Event” in the project
tree. The details are referred to: Detailed manual/Setup/System Settings/Alarm and
Event.

➢ Browse Method

There are three browse methods: “Scroll Bar”, “Slide” and “Browser”.

236 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The scroll bar will display in the alarm list if you check the option “Scroll Bar”. You
can view the alarms by using the scroll bar. The “Scrollbar Width” needs to be set. The
unit of it is pixel.

You can check the option “Slide” in order to view the alarms by sliding the screen.
This function is supported by the capacitive screen devices.

The option “Browser” can be checked when you need to view multiple pages. A word
register needs to be specified to define the current page. The default is that 0 represents
the records on the current day, 1 represents the records on yesterday, 2 represents the
records on the day before yesterday, and so on. The word register input is referred to:
Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byer Address Input.

➢ Show List

“Display Language”

The “Display Language” is selected to switch the current display language for editing
the Title Description. The details are referred to: Detailed manual/Setup/System
Settings/Language Settings.

“Show Title”

The option “Show Title” is checked by default. If you do not want to display the title
bar, you can cancel the check.

“Title Font Setting”

It is used to set the font of the title bar. The details are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Font settings.

“Sorting Mode”

237 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “Sorting Mode” set the arrangement order of the alarms and events.

If you set “By Date” and select the option “Descending”, the latest event will be
displayed on the top.

If you set “By Level” and select the option “Descending”, the higher level events are
displayed on the top.

If you select the option “Ascending”, the display order is inverse.

“Select Color”

The selected alarm entry will display in the color which is set by the option “Select
Color”.

“Confirm Mode”

When the alarm is triggered, it is in the trigger status. If you want to confirm this
alarm, you need to select the “Confirm Mode”. It can be “Single Click”, “Double Click” or
“Press And Hold”.

“List settings”

The title bar contents of the alarm list are set in the below table. The contents of the
title bar can be set to display by checking it. But the gray Display Items can not be
checked.

For the order of the contents arrangement, you can use the button "Move Up" or
"Move Down" to modify it. The content on the top row will display on the left of the alarm
list. You can restore the default arrangement by clicking the button "Restore Default ".

“Display content beyond the table width”

There are two modes, “Scroll” and “Interrupt”, to display the title contents when they
are more than the alarm list width. You can select one mode to display.

238 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The content will be displayed by scrolling if you select the “Scroll” mode. You need
to set the step size (Step: 1 to 255 pixels), and the scrolling speed (Speed: 1 to
255*0.1s).

The excess contents will be truncated directly if you select the “Interrupt” mode.

“Alarming Status Display”

You can set the text color of the alarms and events in the different status here.

“Date and Time Format”

The “Date Format” is used to set the sort order of year (YY), month (MM) and day
(DD). The “Date Separator” is used to set the separator among year, month and day.
The “Time Format” is used to set the time display format.

“Line Spacing and Column Spacing”

The “Line Spacing” and the “Column Spacing” are to set the ranks spacing of the
alarm list. The unit is pixel and the range is 0-255.

• Table
The settings of the “Table” property page TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/
General functions/ Drawing/ Table Drawing.

• Search And Control

The “Search And Control” property TAB is shown as below.

239 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Enable Search Function

Check the option "Enable Search Function" to use the search function.

“Search mode”

There are seven search modes: “Search By Date”, ”Search By Time Range”,
“Search By Sequence”, “By Serial No.”, “By Level”, “Search by Group” and “Register
Query Mode”.

The “Register Query Mode” is a dynamic search mode. You can specify a word
register to dynamically adjust the search mode. If the word register is 0, the “Search By
Date” mode is used. If it is 1, the “Search By Time Range” mode is used. If it is 2, the
“Search By Sequence” mode is used. If it is 3, the “By Serial No.” mode is used. If it is 4,
the “By Level.” mode is used. If it is 5, the “Search by Group.” mode is used. The word
register address input method is referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Address
editor/Standard ByteAddress Input.

“Search Trigger Bit”

The option “Search Trigger Bit” is used to specify a bit register to trigger the search
function. Note that the search function is not edge-triggered mode. When setting the
trigger bit 1, the alarm list displays the filtered results. After set the trigger bit 0, the list

240 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
will display the results which are not filtered. The bit address input method is referred to:
Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Bit Address Input.

“Search Register”

The “Search Register” is used to specify the first word register address for the
search function. The number of the word registers is depending on the search mode.
The function of the word registers used to search is different for the different search
mode. You can get the information of the used word registers according to the text
displayed under the first word register address. The word address input method is
referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard ByteAddress
Input.

➢ Use Control Function

After checking this option, you can use word address registers to control the display
of the alarms and events in the alarm list.

➢ Export CSV
The option “Export CSV” is referred to: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/
Export CSV.
• Display
The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.13.1.3 Alarm Bar (Marquee)

The “Alarm Bar” function is to display the alarms and events in a single line and in a
marquee form. The scrolling direction, step and speed need to be set. A title can be
chosen to display.

241 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• General
➢ Show Group
The specified groups of the alarms and events will display in the Alarm Bar.

➢ Show List

“Display Language”

242 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “Display Language” is selected to switch the current display language for editing
the Title Description. The details are referred to: Detailed manual/Setup/System
Settings/Language Settings.

“Show Title”

The option “Show Title” is checked by default. If you do not want to display the title
bar, you can remove the check.

“List Font Setting”

The button “List Font Setting” is used to set the font of the title bar. The details are
referred to: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/ Font settings.

“Sorting Mode”

The “Sorting Mode” sets the arrangement order of the alarms and events.

If you set “By Date” and select the option “Descending”, the latest event will be
displayed on the top.

If you set “By Level” and select the option “Descending”, the higher level events are
displayed on the top.

If you select the option “Ascending”, the display order is inverse.

“Use Labels”

If you check the option “Use Labels”, the contents of the “Title Description” can use
the default or you can edit them.

If you don’t check the option “Use Labels”, the contents of the “Title Description” can
be set by using the text in the text library. It is shown as below. You can click the button

“ ” to open the text library and select the required text. The details of the Text Library
are referred to: Detailed manual/Library/Text Library.

243 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

“List settings”

The title bar contents of the alarm bar are set in the below table. The contents of the
title bar can be set to display by checking it. But the gray Display Items cannot be
checked.

You can use the button "Move Up" or "Move Down" to modify the order of the
display items arrangement. The content on the top row will display on the left of the
alarm bar. You can restore the default arrangement by clicking the button "Restore
Default ".

“Marquee moving mode”

You can set the scrolling direction of the alarm contents, the step size (Step: 1 to
255 pixels), and the scrolling speed (Speed: 1 to 255*0.1s).

“Alarm Status Display”

The alarm bar only displays the triggered alarms and events. So only the Trigger
Color can be changed.

244 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
“Date Format”

“Line Spacing and Column Spacing”

The “Line Spacing” and the “Column Spacing” are to set the ranks spacing of the
alarm bar. The unit is pixel and the range is 0-255.

• Table
The settings of the “Table” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Table Drawing.

• Display
The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.13.2 Historical Data Display

The function of the “Historical Data Display” is to display the sampling data in tabular
form. The display is continuously refreshed according to the specified sampling
frequency.

245 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.13.2.1 General

• Data Source
Select a data sampling from the pull-down list. If there is no data sampling, you can

quickly build one by clicking the button “ ”. The details are referred to: Detailed
manual/Setup/System Settings/Data Sampling.

• Pause
A bit register address can be set to pause or start the display of the historical data
sampling.

For example: set a bit address LB0 for the option “Pause”. Then when LB0 is OFF,
the latest data sampling is refreshed. When LB0 is ON, the refreshing is paused.

Note:

The refreshing is paused, but sampling is not stopped. All sampling data will be
refreshed.

• Browse Method
The “Browse Method” includes “Scroll Bar”, “Slide”, “Browser” and “Hide Column
Register”.

246 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Scroll Bar

When checking the option “Scroll Bar”, the list will appear scroll bar for viewing. The
scrollbar width can be customized. The unit is pixel.

➢ Slide

You can check the option “Slide” in order to view by sliding the screen. This function
is supported by the capacitive screen devices.

➢ Browser

The option “Browser” can be checked when you need to view multiple pages. A
word register needs to be specified to define the current page. The default is that 0
represents the records on the current day, 1 represents the records on yesterday, 2
represents the records on the day before yesterday, and so on. The word register input
is referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address
Input.

➢ Hide Column Register

If you check the option “Hide Column Register”, a word register can be set. The
value of the word register is used to control the display or hiding of each column.

• Show List

247 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Language
The “Display Language” is selected to switch the current display language for editing
the Title Description. The details are referred to: Detailed manual/ Setup/ System
Settings/ Language Settings.

➢ Display Title Bar

The option “Display Title Bar” is checked by default. If you do not want to display the
title bar, you can remove the check.

➢ Table Font Settings

It is used to set the font of the title bar. The details are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Font settings.

➢ Use Label
By default, the option “Use Label” is checked. The contents of the “Title Description”
can use the default or you can edit them. It is shown as below.

If you don’t check the option “Use Label”, the contents of the “Title Description” can
be set by using the text in the text library. It is shown as below. You can click the button

“ ” to open the text library and select the required text. It is shown as below.

248 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The details of the Text Library are referred to: Detailed manual/Library/Text Library.

➢ Use same font for Title Bar and Table

By default, the font of the contents in the list is same to the font of the title bar. If you
want to define the font of the contents in the list, you can remove the check and set the
font by clicking the button “Table Font Settings”.

The details are referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Font

settings.

➢ Sorting Mode
There are two Sorting Modes: Ascending and Descending. When the option
“Ascending” is selected, the oldest record is displayed in the first row. When the option
“Descending” is selected, the newest record will display on the first row.

➢ List Settings

You can select the required contents to display in the title bar by checking in the
“Use” column. For the order of the contents arrangement, you can use the button "Move
Up" or "Move Down" to modify it. The content on the top row will display on the left of the
Historical Data Display List. You can restore the default arrangement by clicking the
button "Restore Default ".

➢ Date and Time Format

249 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “Date Format” is used to set the sort order of year (YY), month (MM) and day
(DD). The “Date Separator” is used to set the separator among year, month and day.
The “Time Format” is used to set the time display format.

➢ Line Spacing and Column Space

The “Line Spacing” and the “Column Space” are to set the ranks spacing of the alarm list.
The unit is pixel and the range is 0-255. The line space is a unified value, and the column
space can be set one by one and can be set to the same value.

4.6.13.2.2 Table

The settings of the “Table” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/ General
functions/ Drawing/ Table Drawing.

4.6.13.2.3 Search

• Enable Search Function

Check the option "Enable Search Function" to use the search function.

➢ Search mode
There are four search modes supported: “Search By Date”, “Search By Time
Range”, “Search By Sequence” and “Register Query Mode”.

250 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “Register Query Mode” is a dynamic search mode. You can specify a word
register to dynamically adjust the search mode. If the word register is 0, the “Search By
Date” mode is used. If it is 1, the “Search By Time Range” mode is used. If it is 2, the
“Search By Sequence” mode is used. The word register address input method is referred
to: Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

➢ Search Trigger Bit

The option “Search Trigger Bit” is used to specify a bit register to trigger the search
function. Note that the search function is not edge-triggered mode. When set the trigger
bit 1, the alarm list displays the filtered results. After setting the trigger bit 0, the list will
display the results which are not filtered. The bit address input method is referred to:
Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Bit Address Input.
➢ Search Register

The “Search Register” is used to specify the first word register address for the search
function. The number of the word registers is depending on the search mode. The function
of the word registers used to search is different for the different search mode. You can get
the information of the used word registers according to the text displayed under the first
word register address. The word address input method is referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard ByteAddress Input.
• Export CSV
The option “Export CSV” is referred to: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Drawing/ Export CSV.

4.6.13.2.4 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.13.3 Operator Log

The function of the “Operation Log” is to record the required detailed operation of the
HMI device, such as a button is triggered at a certain time, a value is modified at another
certain time, and so on. The “Operation Log component displays the detailed operating
records in the list form. You can search the records or export them.

251 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Note 1:

For the created components, the operations are not recorded by default. To record
the operation of a component, check the "Records Operation" option in the "Control
Settings" property TAB and click the button “Set” to set the operation information. The
details are referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Control settings and
Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Label.

Note 2:

Only when the user privilege is enabled and a user logs in, the operator user name
will be recorded and displayed. When the user privilege is not enabled or there is no user
to log in, the user name is displayed a blank in the operation records.

4.6.13.3.1 General

The general attributes of the “Operator Log” are set in the “General” property TAB.

252 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Browse Method

There are three browse methods: “Scrollbar”, “Screen” and “Browser”.

The scroll bar will display in the alarm list if you check the option “Scrollbar”. You
can view the alarms by using the scroll bar. The “Scrollbar Width” needs to be set. The
unit of it is pixel.

You can check the option “Screen” in order to view the records by sliding the screen.
This function is supported by the capacitive screen devices.

The option “Browser” can be checked when you need to view multiple pages. A
word register needs to be specified to define the current page. The default is that 0
represents the records on the current day, 1 represents the records on yesterday, 2
represents the records on the day before yesterday, and so on. The word register input
is referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address
Input.

• Display the list

253 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Language
The “Language” is selected to switch the current display language for editing the
Title Description. The details are referred to: Detailed manual/ Setup/ System Settings/
Language Settings.

➢ Display Title Bar

The option “Display Title Bar” is checked by default. If you do not want to display the
title bar, you can remove the check.

➢ Title Font Setting

It is used to set the font of the title bar. The details are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Drawing/Font settings.

➢ Use label
By default, the option “Use Label” is checked. The contents of the “Title Bar
Description” can use the default or you can edit them. It is shown as below.

If you don’t check the option “Use Label”, the contents of the “Title Bar Description”
can be set by using the text in the text library. It is shown as below. You can click the

button ” to open the text library and select the required text. It is shown as below.

254 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The details of the Text Library are referred to: Detailed manual/Library/Text Library.

➢ Use same font for Title Bar and List

The details are referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Font

settings.

➢ List Settings

You can select the required contents to display in the title bar by checking in the
“Use” column. For the order of the contents arrangement, you can use the button "Up" or
"Down" to modify it. The content on the top row will display on the left of the Operator
Log List. You can restore the default arrangement by clicking the button "Restore to
default sorting".

255 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
➢ Date and Time Format
The “Date Format” is used to set the sort order of year (YY), month (MM) and day
(DD). The “Date Time Split” is used to set the separator among year, month and day.
The “Time Format” is used to set the time display format.

➢ Row Spacing and Column Spacing

The “Row Spacing” and the “Column Spacing” are to set the ranks spacing of the
operator log list. The unit is pixel and the range is 0-255.

4.6.13.3.2 Table

The settings of the “Table” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/ General
functions/ Drawing/ Table Drawing.

4.6.13.3.3 Checking

• Enable Search Function

Check the option "Enable Search Function" to use the search function.

➢ Search mode
There are four fixed search modes supported: “Check By Date”, “Check By Time
Range”, “Check By Sequence” and “Check By User Name”.

The “Use register to control the search method” is a dynamic search mode. You can
specify a word register to dynamically adjust the search mode. If the word register is 0,
the “Check By Date” mode is used. If it is 1, the “Check By Time Range” mode is used. If
it is 2, the “Check By Sequence” mode is used. If it is 3, the “Check By User Name”

256 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
mode is used. The word register address input method is referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

➢ Search trigger bit

The option “Search trigger bit” is used to specify a bit register to trigger the search
function. Note that the search function is not edge-triggered mode. When set the trigger
bit 1, the alarm list displays the filtered results. After set the trigger bit 0, the list will display
the results which are not filtered. The bit address input method is referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Bit Address Input.
➢ Search Register
The “Search Register” is used to specify the first word register address for the search
function. The number of the word registers is depending on the search mode. The function
of the word registers used to search is different for the different search mode. You can get
the information of the used word registers according to the text displayed under the first
word register address. The word address input method is referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard ByteAddress Input.

• Export CSV
The option “Export CSV” is referred to: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Drawing/ Export CSV.

4.6.13.3.4 Display

The settings of the “Display” property TAB are referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Display.

4.6.14 Tools
The “Tools” component includes “Touch Trigger”, “Canvas”, “Calendar Clock” and
“QR-Code”.

257 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.14.1 Touch Trigger

The “Touch Trigger” component can be used in the occasions that a component or
more components can be triggered not by touching. That is, all components which occupy
the active area of the touch trigger component can be triggered when the register specified
by the touch trigger component meets the conditions.

As shown as above, when the trigger condition of the touch trigger component is met,
the components 1,2 and 3 will be triggered, while component 4 will not be triggered.
The property page of the “Touch Trigger” component is shown as below.

258 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.14.1.1 Trigger Simulation Type

The “Trigger Simulation Type” refers to the trigger type of the “Touch Trigger”
component. It includes “Simulation Click”, “Simulation Sliding” and “Simulation Zoom”.
They are corresponding to the trigger actions when the trigger conditions of the touch
trigger component are met.
• Simulation Click

When the trigger conditions of the touch trigger component are met, the components
which occupy the active area of the touch trigger component will execute the click action,
such as clicking a switch button.

• Simulation Sliding

259 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
When the trigger conditions of the touch trigger component are met, the components
which occupy the active area of the touch trigger component will execute the sliding
action within this area. The sliding action is controlled by two word registers. The first
word register controls the sliding angle, 0 for sliding to right, 90 for sliding up, 180 for
sliding to left, 270 for sliding down. The second word register controls the sliding velocity.
The sliding velocity unit is pixel per second. The address input of the word register is
referred to: Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard ByteAddress
Input.

• Simulation Zoom

When the trigger conditions of the touch trigger component are met, the components
which occupy the active area of the touch trigger component will execute the zooming
action within this area, such as viewing the trend curve by zooming.
The zoom ratio is controlled by a word register. The range of zoom ratio is 0-200, in
percent. The value 1-200 is legal. It represents the zoom percentage which less than 100
is corresponding to reducing and more than 100 is corresponding to amplification. The
address input of the word register is referred to: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Address editor/ Standard ByteAddress Input.

4.6.14.1.2 Triggering Condition

The “Trigger Condition” supports “Bit Status Changing”, “Word Value Changing” and
“Condition Judgment”. The settings are referred to: Detailed manual/Component/Timer
and Data Transmission/Timer.

4.6.14.2 Canvas

The property page of the “Canvas” can be opened by clicking the menu command
"Component/Tools/Canvas".

260 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.14.2.1 Monochrome Brush

You can control the graphics canvas by bit registers. You can modify the canvas color
and the pen color, as shown as below.

In the above settings, you can see that the Canvas Width is 128 and the Canvas
Height is 128 in the “Display” property page. The size of the canvas is 128*128.So the
occupied LB addresses number is 16384. It is displayed in the “General” property page.
If any of the address LB0 ~ 160000 is 1, the corresponding pixel on the canvas is white.
If it is 0, the corresponding pixel on the canvas is black. You can also check the "Bit-
index within a Byte Register" to set the canvas. It is easy to program a complex graphic.
You can set LW0=65535 (0xFFFF) directly if you want all LW0.0~ LW0.15 to be 1.

261 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.14.2.2 Multicolor Brush

The settings of the “Multicolor Brush” are similar to the monochrome brush. The
default canvas color is white. Each pixel of the canvas is controlled by using word
register addresses. The color of pen brush is based on the value of the corresponding
word address according to the RGB565 form.

The RGB565 mode is a color mode which a pixel occupies two bytes. The first 5 bits
in the low byte are used to indicate B (BLUE). The last 3 bits in the low byte + the first 3
bits in the high byte are used to indicate G (Green). The last 5 bits in the high byte are
used to indicate R (RED).

4.6.15 Pipeline
The “Pipeline” component includes three types: Horizontal, Vertical and Elbow.

262 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.15.1 Horizontal

4.6.15.1.1 Pipeline

The Pipe Diameter and Pipe wall thickness should be given when you use a
horizontal component. It is shown as below.

263 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.6.15.1.2 Flow Block

The “Flow Block” property page is mainly used to set the width and length of the pipe
and the flow block. The flow direction and flow velocity parameters are also set here. It is
shown as below.

Note:

For example, the system will use LW0, LW1 and LW2 to control the flow block of the
pipe when the Flow Speed is set LW0.

4.6.15.1.3 Flow Block Graphics

The graphic of the flow block is set here. You can edit the graphic and the display
color in different status. It is shown as below.

264 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.15.1.4 Display settings

The overall height and width of the pipeline component are set here. The settings
are shown as below. Note that the “Width” of the component should be greater than the
length of the flow block and the “Height” of the component should be greater than the
diameter of the pipeline.

4.6.15.2 Vertical

The settings of a vertical pipeline are similar to a horizontal pipeline. The attribute of
vertical or horizontal can be switched directly in the “Pipeline” property page. It is shown
as below.

265 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.6.15.3 Elbow

It is mainly used to connect the horizontal pipeline and the vertical pipeline. There
are many kinds of elbows in the graphics library. You can use it by clicking the button
“Import” to select one to use. They are shown as below.

4.7 Library

4.7.1 GraphicsLibrary

Many graphics need to be used in the project configuration. The LT Studio

software has a graphics library which provides rich graphics. The users can also add
their own pictures to the library to use.

The commands of Graphics Library include “Add Graphics” and “Browse Graphics
Library”. You can use any of these commands by clicking the menu command "Library/Add

266 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Graphics" or "Library/Browse Graphics Library". You can also double-click the "Library/
Add Graphics" or "Library/ Browse Graphics Library" in the project tree.

4.7.1.1 Add Graphics

The “Add Graphics” window is shown as below.

4.7.1.1.1 Name, Status Count, Width and Height

You need to give a name for the new added graphic. A graphic may have many
statuses. You should set the number of the statuses for the option “Status Count”. And
you should also set the Width and the Height for your graphic.

267 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.7.1.1.2 Modify on current graphics library

Please check the option "Modify on current graphics library" if you want to modify
the selected graphic from the graphics library. Then you can click the button “Select
Graphics” to select a graphic from the library.

4.7.1.1.3 Edit

Click the button “OK” to confirm. Then the graphic editor window is displayed. The
content of the editor window is corresponding to the selected status. It is shown as
below.

4.7.1.2 Browse Graphics Library

The menu command “Browse Graphics Library” is used to open the “View Graphics
Library”. It is shown as below.

268 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.7.1.2.1 Add, Edit and Rename Graphics

You can add a new graphic to the library by clicking the button “Add New Graphics”.
After select a graphic in the library, you can modify it by clicking the button “Edit
Graphics” and rename it by clicking the button “Rename Graphics”.

269 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.7.2 Text Library

The text can be saved in the form of multi-languages and multi-statuses by using the
function of the Text Library. It can facilitate the users to use the text and modify it
together in the project.

The Text Library can be opened by clicking the menu command “Library/ Text
Library” or double-click the “Library/ Text Library” in the project tree.

270 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “Text Library” window will pop up. It is shown as below.

4.7.2.1 Search

After enter the name required to find and click the button “Search”, all items which
match the content will be found out.

Note that only the name is supported to find. The content in different language is not
supported to search.

4.7.2.2 Language Display

After click the button “Language Display”, the “Language Display” window will pop
up. It is shown as below.

4.7.2.2.1 Language Settings

After clicking the button “Language Settings”, the “Language Settings” property
page will be opened. You can add or delete language and set the display color, size and
other information here. The details of the “Language Settings” are referred to: Detailed
manual/ Setup/ System Settings/Language Settings.

4.7.2.2.2 Other settings

271 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The checked languages will be displayed in the “Text Library” window. And you can
check all the languages by clicking the button “Select All”. Meanwhile, you can modify
the order of the languages by clicking the button “Up” or “Down” after select a language.

Note:

The settings are valid for the language display effect in the “Text Library” window. It
does not change the order of languages.

4.7.2.3 Sort by Name

After clicking the button “Sort by Name”, all items in the text library will be sorted in
the increasing order by the first letter of the item name.

4.7.2.4 Display All Languages

After checking the button “Display All Language”, all the languages will display in the
table including which is not checked in the “language display” window.

4.7.2.5 A~Z letters

The A~Z letters are used to locate the desired item.

4.7.2.6 Preview box

The same content to the selected text in the table displays simultaneously in the
preview box. If you modify the content in the preview box, the selected text in the table
will be modified to the same content.

Note:

The name of the item is not displayed in the preview box.

The item in the table is shown as below.

272 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Note:

The name of the item cannot be blank and not be duplicated.

4.7.2.7 New

A new item will be created after you click the button “New”.

4.7.2.8 Delete

The selected item will be deleted after you click the button “Delete”.

4.7.3 Address Tag Library

The “Address Tag Library” saves the addresses in the tag form. This makes it easy
to use and modify the address for the user.

The Address Tag Library can be opened by clicking the menu command “Library/
Address Label Library” or double-click the “Library/ Address Tag Library” in the project
tree.

273 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.7.3.1 Table preview

The table in the “Address Tag Library” displays the information of all the address
tags.

4.7.3.2 New Bit

After click the button “New Bit”, the “Create Bit Address” dialog will pop up. You can
create a new bit address here. The details to input the bit address are referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard Bit Address Input.

4.7.3.3 New Word

After click the button “New Word”, the “Create Byte Address” dialog will pop up. You
can create a new word address here. The details to input the bit address are referred to:
Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard ByteAddress Input.

4.7.3.4 Delete

Delete the selected tag.

274 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.7.3.5 Delete All

Delete all tags.

4.7.3.6 Edit

Modify the selected tag.

4.7.4 Audio Library

In the LT Studio software, you can use some specific audios. These audios can be
selected from the Audio Library or be added from the other devices.

The Audio Library can be opened by clicking the menu command “Library/ Audio
Library” or double-click the “Library/ Audio Library” in the project tree.

The “Audio Library” is opened as below.

275 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.7.4.1 Import Audio

After click the button “Import Audio” or “Import from System Catalogue”, the audio
file in the current computer can be imported to the Audio Library.

4.7.4.2 Export Audio

You can click the button “Export Audio” to export the selected audio. So the other
projects can use it.

276 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.7.4.3 Play Audio

After you import the audio to the Audio Library and select it, you can click the button
“Play Audio” to listen.

4.7.4.4 “Delete Audio” and “Clear”

You can delete the selected audio by clicking the button “Delete Audio”. And you
can delete all the audios of the Audio Library by clicking the button “Clear”.

4.7.4.5 Name

You can change the name of the imported audio in the edit box “Audio Name” for
your project.

277 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.7.5 Watch Address Table

‘’Insert Watch Address’’ button will be used in the alarm content display of the
‘’Alarm and Event Detail Setting’’. You can set the ‘’Watch Address Table’’ in the
following ways.

You can click the button as shown in the figure to enter the ‘’Watch Address Table’’
( path : Alarm and Event Display/Alarm and Events Login/Create/Insert Watch Address),
you can also enter it through the tool bar(path: Library /Watch Address Table) .

The ‘’Watch Address Table’’ page is shown as below:

278 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Add: You can add new watch address entry. Click ‘’Add’’, set the watch address
name, such as "Fire Alarm", and set the address of the watch entry, such as "local

register LW0",set the data format, there are various data types to choose; click
‘’Confirm’’ after setting finished, you can see the figure as below.

Modify: You can modify the created watch address entry.

Delete: You can delete the selected watch address entry.

Clear: You can delete all watch address entries.

Select and Quit : When you enter the ‘’Watch Address Table’’ from the ‘’Alarm and
Event Detailed Setting’’ page, select the watch address entry you are using, click the
‘’Select and Quit’’ button to complete setting.

4.7.6 Device Tag Library

279 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “Device Tag Library” saves the device addresses in the tag form. This makes it
easy for the users to use and modify the addresses .

You need add the contents of the tag first when using the devices of tag type. The
added tag should be the tags on the tag type devices.

Add Equipment: Click the ‘’Add Equipment’’ button, select the ‘’Serial Port Type’’,
and select the ‘’Manufacturer’’ and ‘’Device Type’’. Then click ‘’OK’’ to finish adding after
selecting device, the added device should be the tag type device here, such as the figure
shown as below.

280 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Add Tags

Add: You can add tags manually, enter the tag name, select the data type and station
number, click ‘’Save’’ after finishing adding.

Import: You can import the tags directly in the form of file, this will facilitate users to
quickly establish a tag library. the tag file format can be imported is CSV file. The CSV
format files can be exported by the tag type PLC software, you can also make it with Excel,
About the table format, you can refer to ‘’Export the CSV File’’.

Export: You can export the added contents of the tag library as CSV format files,
which you can quickly import to other devices to use.

Data type: You can classify and group the data type of the device tags, this will
facilitate users to quickly select the data type they need. Click the ‘’Data Type’’ button,
click the ‘’Add Category’’, then you can define the category name, click the ‘’Add Data
Group’’, you can add the elements of the group - data type. Click ‘’Close’’ after the
definition.

281 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
After defining the data type, you can see the data type just defined in the ‘’Data Type’’
page, as shown below: you can select the data type for the ‘’LT / abc.REAL’’, the nature
of this type is ‘’REAL’’.

Delete Data Type:

Right-click the data category then you can modify category, delete category, and add data
group. Right-click data group then you can delete the data group.

4.8 Macro

4.8.1 Create Macro

Click the menu command "Macro/ Create Macro" or double-click the "Macro/ Create
Macro" in the project tree, you can open the “Create Macro” window. It is shown as
below.

282 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

(1) Name
You need to designate a name for the new macro. It will be displayed in the "Macro"
directory of the project tree. When you call and execute a macro, the name is used. It
can be in Chinese or English.

(2) Description
The “Description” is used to introduce the macro, which is similar to the
"Comments". It can be in Chinese or English.

Click the button "OK" to confirm and the new macro will be displayed in the macro
editor as below. You can also click the button "Cancel" to cancel the new macro.

You can edit the macro code in the code editor window. The details are referred to:
Use topic/Macro.

4.8.2 Edit Macro

283 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Click the menu command "Macro/ Edit Macro", you can open the “Macro Instruction”
window. It is shown as below.

The existing macros are listed on the left side of the “Macro Instruction” window.

After clicking any one of the existing macros, you can delete, modify, import and
export it. But the deleted macro will not be recovered.

After double-click any one of the macro, the macro can be opened and display in the
code editor window area.

The details are referred to: Use topic/Macro.

4.8.3 Enable Password Verification

You can use the password verification function to protect the macro codes.

Click the menu command "Macro/Enable Password Verification", you can open the
"Set Macro Password" window.

284 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Note the “Confirm Password” needs to be same to the “Password”. Otherwise the
“OK” button will be unavailable.

After you enable password verification, the “Verify Password” window will pop up
when you click the menu command “Create Macro” or “Edit Macro”. These two menu
commands can be use only after you entering the correct password. The “Verify
Password” window is shown as below.

If you want to cancel the password verification function, you can click the menu
command "Macro/Enable Password verification" again and enter the correct password to
cancel the password verification function.

If you want to modify the macro password, the details are referred to: Detailed
manual/Macro/Update MacroPassword.

Note: The macro password is a global password. All macros need to password
verification once you enable the password verification function. You can’t set a password
for a single macro.

4.8.4 Update Macro Password

285 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
If you use the “Enable Password Verification” function, the menu command “Update
Macro Password” is available. Otherwise this command is not available.

The menu command “Update Macro Password” is available. It is shown as below.

The menu command “Update Macro Password” is not available. It is shown as

below.

After click the "Update Password Verification", the “Update macro password”
window will pop up.

Enter the correct old password and valid new password, then clicking the button
“OK” to confirm the password modification.

If the new password is not valid, the button “OK” is unavailable.

After click the button “OK”, a “Warning” window will pop up to message that the old
password is error if the old password is not correct.

286 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.9 Recipe

Recipe refers to a group of data saved in a continuous registers of the HMI device.
The data in this area is resistant after powering off. It can be quickly downloaded to the
controller.

Click the menu command "Recipe/ Create Recipe" or double-click the "Recipe/
Create Recipe" in the project tree, you can open the “Recipe” settings page. It is shown
as below.

4.9.1 General

4.9.1.1 Name

287 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
You need to specify a name for the new recipe for the "Name" option. The name can
be English, numbers, letters, and so on. The prefix name "RP_" is fixed and not editable.
It represents a "recipe register". For example, if you give a name "coffee" for a recipe,
then the whole name of the recipe is "RP_ coffee". The recipe word register name is
“RPW_coffee”.

4.9.1.2 Recipe Length

The default “Recipe Length” is 1. You can modify it by clicking the button "Data
Entry" or clicking the title of the settings page "Data Information". The Recipe Length
refers to the number of words occupied by each group of this recipe.

4.9.1.3 Array Formula

The default value of the “Array Formula” is 1000. It ranges from 1 to 65535.

The whole length of the word register addresses occupied by the recipe can be
calculated after you set the “Recipe Length” and the “Array Formula”. For example, if the
“Recipe Length” is 10 and the “Array Formula” is 1000, then the whole length of the word
register addresses occupied by the recipe is 10*1000=10000.

4.9.1.4 Address of Recipe Storage

You can view the details of the addresses occupied by the recipe in the “Address of
Recipe Storage” area. It is shown as below.

4.9.1.4.1 Word address range

288 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
For example, the “Recipe Length” is 10 and the “Array Formula” is 1000, so the whole
length of the word register addresses occupied by the recipe is 10*1000=10000. The
Recipe name is “RP_Coffee”. So the address range of the word registers is "RPW_ Coffee:
0 ~ 9999".

4.9.1.4.2 Word address index range

In the above example, the “Recipe Length” is 10 for each group of the recipe. So the
Word address index range is "RPWI_ coffee: 0-9."

4.9.1.4.3 Bit address range

The bit address range is determined by the word address range. So the bit address
in the above example is "RPB_ coffee: 0.0 to 9999.15."

4.9.1.4.4 Bit address index range

Similarly, the bit address index range is determined by the “Recipe Length”. So the
“Bit address index range” is "RPBI_ coffee: 0.0 to 9.15."

4.9.1.4.5 Current recipe ID register

The “Current recipe ID register” is used to specify the group number of the recipe. For
the above example, the “Current recipe ID register” is “RPI_coffee: 0”.It is a unique register
for each recipe.

4.9.1.4.6 Use External Address as Recipe index

It is not checked by default. If it is checked, you can specify a word address as a

recipe ID register and the "Current recipe ID register" (such as "RPI_ Coffee: 0") is not
valid.

4.9.1.5 Clear current recipe bit address

It is not checked by default. If it is checked, you can specify a bit address. If it is set
ON, the current data of the recipe group which specified by the recipe ID register will be
cleared. After the data is cleared, this bit address will be reset OFF. It is shown as below.

289 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

For example, if the value of the "RPI_ coffee: 0" register is 3, the data of the No. 3
group of the recipe “RP_coffee” will be cleared when the “Clear current recipe bit
address” LB0 is set ON. After finish clearing,LB0 will be reset OFF.

4.9.1.6 Note: Clear all recipe bit addresses

It is not checked by default. If it is checked, you can specify a bit address. If it is set
ON, the data of all the recipe groups will be cleared. After the data is cleared, this bit
address will be reset OFF. It is shown as below.

290 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

For the above example, all the data of the recipe “RP_coffee” will be cleared if the
bit register LB1 is ON. After the data is cleared, LB1 will be reset OFF.

4.9.2 Data Information

The default "Data Information" settings page is shown as below.

291 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The default recipe length is 1. A 16-bit unsigned data is preset.

4.9.2.1 Modify

After double-click the selected entry, the “Data Setting” dialog will pop up. You can
modify the settings for this entry. It is shown as below.

4.9.2.1.1 Name

A description for the data of this entry can be given here.

4.9.2.1.2 Address Offset

It refers to the address offset of this entry in the recipe. The address offset of the
first entry starts from 0. It is determined according to the data type and the entry order by
system and not be edited.

4.9.2.1.3 Data Type

A data type needs to be set here. The default is "16-bit Unsigned”.

4.9.2.1.4 Data Group

It is not checked by default. You can check it when you need to define a group of
the same data type data for this entry.

292 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “Length” option needs to set for the data group when you check the option"
Data Group".

Click the button “OK” to finish the settings for the selected entry.

4.9.2.2 Insert

After select an entry in the list and then click the button "Insert", a new entry will be
added before the selected entry.

4.9.2.3 Add

After click the button "Add", a new data entry will be added after the last data entry.

4.9.2.4 Move Up

For many data entry, the selected data entry will be moved up a row after click the
button "Move Up".

4.9.2.5 Move Down

For many data entry, the selected data entry will be moved down a row after click
the button "Move Down".

4.9.2.6 Delete

The selected data entry will be deleted from the list after click the button "Delete".

For example, the recipe "RP_coffee" has only one entry and the data type of the
entry is "16-bit Unsigned ". The Recipe Length is 10. The data setting of the entry is
shown as below.

After click the button “OK” to confirm the entry setting, the “Data Information” setting
page of this recipe is shown as below.

293 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Thus, a named "RP_coffee" recipe is created. It will be displayed in the project tree.
It is shown as below.

4.10 Setup

4.10.1 HMI settings

You can open the “HMI Settings” property TAB by clicking the menu command
"Setup/ HMI Settings ". It is shown as below.

294 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.10.1.1 Model

The “Model” displays the type of the current selected HMI device.

4.10.1.2 Description

The detailed information of the current HMI device is displayed in the “Description”
area.

4.10.1.3 Ethernet setting

You can set the Ethernet connection properties for the current HMI device. The
setting mode of IP address can be “Auto IP Address (DHCP)” or “Static Address”.

If you select a “Static Address” mode, the IP address can be assigned here. Or you
can use the SRW registers to set the IP address.

295 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
When SRB10000=0, the setting mode is DHCP. When SRB10000=1, the “Static
Address” mode is used to assign the IP address. You can switch the IP address setting
mode by the SRB10000 register.

4.10.1.4 Rotation Display

There are 4 rotation display effect. They are “Normal (Horizontal Display)”, Vertical
(Rotate 90 degrees Clockwise), “Vertical (counterclockwise)” and “Upside down (Rotate
180 degrees)”. You can preview the display effect of the character “A” on the right area.

The rotation display mode should be selected according to the installation direction
of the HMI device.

4.10.1.5 Color Setting

You can select “16 Bit Color (65535 Color)” or “24 Bit Color (16777216 Color)”
based on your project. This setting will take effect after restarting.

4.10.1.6 Exchange HMI

If you want to change the HMI device type for your project, you can click the button
“Exchange HMI”.

296 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The “Change HMI Model” dialog will pop up after you click the button “Exchange
HMI”.

After you select the “Target HMI Model” for your project and click the button
“Exchange” to confirm the setting, the project will be converted to adapt the new HMI
device.

The resolution and color need to be adjusted by manual after the exchanging
operation. Because the resolution and color change may result in the change of the
window size and the loss of color.

4.10.2 System Settings

297 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.10.2.1 Global Settings

You can set the project properties, backlight and screensaver, initialization, the main
window, touch audio and other related attributes in the “Global Settings” property TAB.

Click the menu command "Setup/ System Settings/Global Settings" to open the
“Global Settings” property TAB. It is shown as below.

4.10.2.1.1 Project Properties

• Upload

If you check “Upload” and set the “Password”, the project can be allowed to upload
when the other user enter the password after it is downloaded to the HMI device. The

298 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
uploaded project file can be downloaded to the other HMI device by using the LT
Studio software Tools.

Note:

The uploaded project file is a special archive. The project can be opened after
decompilation by the LT Studio software.

• Decompilation

If you check “Decompilation” and set the “Password”, the project can be allowed to
decompile by the LTStudio Tools after the password is entered.

Note:

➢ If only the “Decompilation” is checked, the Fpg file of this project can be
decompiled after entering the correct password. But this project can’t be
uploaded.
➢ If only the “Upload” is checked, this project can be uploaded after enter the
correct password. But the Fpg file of this project can’t be decompiled.
➢ If the “Upload” and the “Decompilation” are not checked, the size of the file after
compiling is the least. But it cannot be uploaded or decompiled. On the other
hand, it is safest way to protect your project.

• Download Password

The HMI projects can be downloaded if the option is not checked. After checking the
option, then you need to enter the password every time you want to download projects
from the HMI, to avoid the original projects to be replaced.

4.10.2.1.2 Backlight and Screensaver

• Dim the brightness

You can check the option “Dim the brightness” to adjust the backlight lightness after
the specified time. The lightness can be set “Lowest”, “10%”, “20%”, “30%”, “50%” or
“80%”. The specified time needs to input in integer.

299 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Turn off Backlight

➢ Dim down and wait for

You can set a specified time to turn off the backlight after the lightness is adjusted.
The default value is 10. That means it will keep 10 minutes after the backlight lightness is
adjusted. Then the backlight will be turned off.

Note:

The configuration screen will be visible after the backlight is turned off.

➢ Turn on backlight upon Alarm/Events

If you check the option “Turn on backlight upon Alarm/Events”, the backlight will be
turned on automatically when the alarms or events occur and the backlight is off during
the running.

• Screensaver

If you check the option “Screensaver”, the Screen saver Window will be switched to
display when the time is up. The Screen saver Window must be specified. It is used to
display the company LOGO.

• Require Password to exit Screensaver

If you check the option “Require Password to exit Screensaver”, a system message
window will pop up to prompt you to enter the corresponding level password when you
want to exit the screen saver window.

300 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Note:

You need to use the character input component to enter the password to SRW100 ~
103.
• Return to original screen when Screensavers is over

If you check the option “Return to original screen when Screensavers is over”, it will
return to the original screen when you click the HMI screen. Of course, if you set a
password, the system message window will pop up to prompt you to enter the password
before return to the original screen.

Note:

If you don’t check the option “Return to original screen when Screensavers is over”,
it will still stay in the screensaver window when the screensaver is over.

4.10.2.1.3 Local Register Endian Order

The “Local Register Endian Order” refers to the order of the high byte and the low
byte. For example, a 32-bit register LW0=0x12345678. If you select the “4321” mode,
then the word register LW0=0x1234 and the word register LW1=0x5678. If you select the
“2143” mode, then the word register LW0=0x5678 and the word register LW1=0x1234.

4.10.2.1.4 Scrollbar

For some components without setting the scrollbar width, you can set it in the
“Scrollbar Width” option. For example, you set the scrollbar width for the pop up window
component here.

4.10.2.1.5 Initialization

• Initial Window

The “Initial Window” refers to the first displayed configuration window after the
project is downloaded to the HMI or the HMI is powered on.

• Initial Macro

After check the “Initial Macro”, you can specify a Macro to run before the
configuration window is displayed. This function can realize the initial work of your
project.

4.10.2.1.6 Main Window(HOME)

301 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The main window can be set here. So you can return to the main window in any
configuration window by setting “Return to the main window (HOME)” for the “Window
Operation” function of the Bit Set component.

4.10.2.1.7 Drop-down window

If this function is checked, you can specify a window as a pull-down window, where
you can put the alarm events and other related components to display. This function is
valid only for the capacitive HMI device.

Note:

When you slide the HMI window to more than half the width of the window from the
upper edge down during running the project, the Drop-down window will display
gradually. Similarly, when you slide to more than half the width of the window from the
lower edge up, the Drop-down window will be withdrawn.

4.10.2.1.8 Clock

The “Source” of Clock can be set “HMI Internal Clock” or “External Device”.

If you select the “HMI Internal Clock” as the HMI clock, SRW0~7 will be used to
save the time source of events, historical data, etc.

If you select the “External Device”, the registers address can be changed.

302 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.10.2.1.9 Touch Audio

• Buzzer is enabled

If only the option “Buzzer Is Enabled” is checked, the buzzer will beep for a specified
time when you touch the effective components, such as buttons.

If the option “Enable Control” is also checked, you need to select a bit register.
When the bit register is ON, the function of “Buzzer Is Enabled” is allowed to use. For
example, the LB0 is set for the “Enable Control”. If LB0 is ON, the buzzer will beep when
you touch the effective components. When it is OFF, the buzzer will not beep. The option
“Buzzer Time” can set 50ms, 75ms,100ms,150ms,200ms,300ms,500ms,800ms, and1s.

• Touch Audio Enabled

If the option “Touch Audio Enabled” is checked, all audio play is available. It is
selected by default.

303 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
If the option “Enable Control” is also checked, you need to select a bit register.
When the bit register is ON, the function of “Touch Audio Enabled” is allowed to use. For
example, the LB1 is set for the “Enable Control”. If LB1 is ON, the audio play is available.
if it is OFF, the audio will not be available.

Note:

If the option “Touch Audio Enabled” is not checked in the global settings, the audio
will not be available even if the audio is active in the proper TAB of the effective
component.

4.10.2.2 Extended Settings

4.10.2.2.1 Public Window Position

The attribute of “Public Window Position” can be set “Below Basic Window” or
“Above Basic Window”. The option “Below Basic Window” is selected by default.

304 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The effect of the “Below Basic Window” is shown as below.

The effect of the “Above Basic Window” is shown as below.

4.10.2.2.2 Performance

If you check the option “Disable Vector Font Bordline Blurring Processing”, the
display effect of the fonts will have some burr. It does not look smooth and good, but the
display speed is faster. You can use this option to get higher display speed when less
display quality is demanded.

Note: the speed difference is not obvious for the hardware which the version is
above A8. So you need not check this option generally.

If you don’t check the option “Disable Vector Font Bordline Blurring Processing”, the
display effect is shown as below.

If you check the option “Disable Vector Font Bordline Blurring Processing”, the
display effect is shown as below.

305 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.10.2.2.3 Window Default Settings

There are three options for the “Window Default Settings”. They are “Slow In”, “Slow Out”
and “Switch Window by Horizontal Sliding”. The three options are valid only for the capacitive
screen.

• “Slow In” and “Slow Out”

After the “Slow In” or “Slow Out” is checked, the new window will have a fade effect.
You can find the “Fade in” option is checked by default in the “Basic” property TAB of the
new window. Another window effect is “Fade out”. The fade effect is only valid for the
capacitive HMI device.

Note:

306 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The fade effect will produce an effect on the speed of switching windows obviously.
The economic HMI models are not suggested to be used.

• Switch Window by Horizontal Sliding

After the “Switch Window by Horizontal Sliding” option is checked, the windows can
be switched by horizontal sliding action. This function is only supported by the capacitive
HMI devices.

You can set the operation for this function in the “Action and Function” property TAB
of the basic window.

If you click the ‘’Use Swiping Around’’ option, then the function of horizontal sliding
will take effect, the function is only valid for the capacitive HMI.

If you click the ‘’Disable Ipomoea return to the main window’’ option, then the
function of ‘’Ipomoea return to the main window’’ is disabled, the function is
enabled by default, you can check the option if you do not need it. It can be controlled by
the special register ‘’SRB10012=1’’, too.

Operate Log Save Settings:

307 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

This settings is the global settings, the operating steps can be recorded without
setting the operate log control, the default is ‘’unsave’’, you can choose to save to the
local HMI, SD card, USB1. The address of storing operate log is retained after power
down, you can define the subdirectory name by yourself. The files saved is Db files.

Save CSV File meanwhile: The operate log will be saved as Db file and CSV file at
the same time. The CSV file can be opened directly and viewed with Excel.

Maximum Saving Limit: there is no limit when it is 0, you can click the option
‘’Delete Old Records’’ when the cache is full, the new operate log will continue recording,
‘’Discard New Records’’, it will not record the operate log any more if the cache is full.

You can set the ‘’Notify Register’’ when the cache is full, as shown below, LB0 is set
to 1 when the free space is less than 512KB.

You can set a flag bit to clear the historic records of the operate log.

308 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.10.2.3 Language Settings

4.10.2.3.1 Language

• Language Count

You can select the number of the languages in the list of the “Language Count”
option. Then you set the languages in the table. The languages should be different in the
table. You can modify the languages by the lists in the table.

309 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Default Language

You can select a language from the list as the “Default Language”. After
downloading the project, the specified default language will be as the display language.
You can switch the display language by changing the value of SRW10050. The No.1
language will be displayed when SRW10050 is 0. The No.2 language will be displayed
when SRW10050 is 1. The No.3 language will be displayed when SRW10050 is 2. And
so on. The display language will be changed to the specified “Default Language” when
the project is downloaded again.

4.10.2.3.2 Default Font

Refer to: Detailed manual/ General functions/ Drawing/ Font settings.

4.10.2.4 Favorite Font Templates

The function is used to save the common font styles as a template. You can use this
template when you set the font style.

4.10.2.4.1 Open the “Favorite Font Templates”

You can open the “Favorite Font Templates” settings page in the project tree or by
clicking the menu command “Setup/System Settings/Favorite Font Templates”.

310 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.10.2.4.2 Add Font Templates

First, click the button "Add(A)". Then give a name for the current font template in the
“Description”. The font style need to be set, referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Drawing/Font settings. At last, click the button “OK” to confirm and save the
settings

311 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.10.2.4.3 Usea font template

For example, a font template is used in the property settings of a Static Text
component.

First, click the button "Import from Favorite Font Templates" in the property window
of a Static Text component to open the “Import from Favorite Font Templates” dialog.
Then select the required font template and click the OK button. The result is shown as
below.

312 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.10.2.5 User Level

You can set the levels and the level passwords for the users in the “User Level”
settings page. The settings of the “User Level” are valid in the whole HMI system. The
higher the level is, the greater the range which can be operated is. The higher user level
can access the screen windows which the lower user level can access. But it is not
prohibited that the lower user level accesses the higher user level.

4.10.2.5.1 Open

The “User Level” settings page can be opened by double-clicking the “User Level”
option in the System Settings of the project tree or click the menu command “Setup/
System Settings /User Level”.

4.10.2.5.2 Edit

313 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “User Level” settings page is shown as below.

You can set the number of the user level in the “User Level Count” by using the list.
And you can edit the information of every user level in the table, such as the Predefined
Password and the Grade Description.

4.10.2.5.3 Use

For example, set the user level function for the "Bit Switch" component.

Open the property window of the "Bit Switch" component and select the option
“Conditional” in the property TAB of “Control Settings”. Check the option “Level User”
and select the level from the list. It is shown as below.

314 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Run the project. A “User level login” window will pop up when you click the
component. It is shown as below. You can operate the component only by entering the
correct password in the “User level login” window.

4.10.2.6 User Privilege

The “User Privilege” is used to provide security for the user operations. The different
privilege is given when the user enter the different user name and the corresponding
password.

4.10.2.6.1 Add

The “User Privilege” settings page can be opened by double-clicking the “User
Privilege” option in the System Settings of the project tree or click the menu command
“Setup/ System Settings /User Privilege”.

315 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

After clicking the button "Add", the “User Privilege Settings” dialog will pop up.

4.10.2.6.2 Set

You can set different User names, Initial Password and Logout Time for different
privileges in the “User Privilege Settings” dialog. The login state of the current user will
exit if the login time is more than the Logoff Time.

4.10.2.6.3 Use

You can use the “User Privilege” in many situations, such as the control settings, the
window switch, the value input, and so on.

316 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.10.2.6.4 Call

You can find some windows which the system provides in the project tree, such as
the User privilege window, the User login window, and so on. These windows make it
easy to use for the users.

4.10.2.7 Task Schedule

The “Task Schedule” is used to execute some operations when time is up.

You can open the “Task Schedule” property TAB by clicking the menu command
"Setup/ System Settings/Task Schedule". It is shown as below.

317 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

After click the button "New(N)", the “Task Schedule Details” window pop up. It is
shown as below.

4.10.2.7.1 Description

You can give a name for the task schedule in the “Description” edit box. This
description can facilitate the identification in programming.

318 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.10.2.7.2 Enable Control

After you check the option “Enable Control”, you can select a bit register. When the
bit is ON, this Task Scheduler is not allowed to use.

4.10.2.7.3 Mode

• Week Day

The start time and the end time are within a week.

• Every Other Day

The start time and the end time can execute in the adjacent two weeks. The Week
Day of the start time is only selected one. You must set the end time.

• HMI Address

Use word registers to set the mode.

4.10.2.7.4 Execution upon Start and Execute upon End

319 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Only an “Execution upon Start” setting page is displayed by default. The “Execute
upon End” setting page is visible if you check the option “Set End Time”. They are shown
as below.

The operations need to be executed are listed in the “Execution upon Start” setting
page and the “Execute upon End” setting page.

• Execute upon power up

If you check the option “Execute upon power up”, the operations checked in the
“Execution upon Start” setting page will be executed in the time range (start time - end
time).It will stop outside the time range.

• Execute Ending Operation upon Power Off

If you check the option “Execute Ending Operation upon Power Off”, the operations
checked in the “Execute upon End” setting page will be executed in the time range (start
time - end time).It will stop outside the time range.

• Bit Setting

This operation is to set a bit register ON or OFF.

• Word Setting

This operation is to change the value of a word register.

• Trigger Macro

This operation is to trigger a Macro.

• Popup Window

This operation is to pop up a window.

320 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• Use Buzzer

This operation is to make the internal buzzer of HMI to ring.

• Play Audio

This operation is to play an audio.

4.10.2.8 Data Sampling

The "Data Sampling" is the data source of these components such as the "Trend
Curve", the "Historical Data Display", and so on. You must create the "Data Sampling"
before using these components. You can open the “Data Sampling” property TAB by
clicking the menu command "Setup/ System Settings/Data sampling". It is shown as
below.

4.10.2.8.1 Property Setting

After clicking the button "New" in the “Data Sampling” property TAB, the "Data
Sampling Property" dialog will pop up. It is shown as below.

321 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Description

The “Description” is used as the name of the “Data Sampling”. It is a required the
attribute. If it is null, there will be a red exclamation mark to indicate that a name is
needed here. The “Description” can be a text which is easy to understand, such as
“Level of Tank 1”, “Temperature of Main Motor”, and so on.

• Data Sampling Starting Address

A word register is needed to specify as the start address of the data sampling here.
It is can be an internal address of the HMI and the register address of the controller
which is connected to the HMI.

• Control Setting

Three attributes of the Control Setting are optional. They are not be checked by
default. You can check or not check them according to the actual needs.

➢ Pause Control

If the “Pause Control” is checked, you can set a bit address to control the data
sampling. When this bit address is ON, the data sampling is paused. When it is OFF, the
data sampling will continue.

➢ Clear Control

If the “Clear Control” is checked, you can set a bit address to clear the sampling
data. When this bit address is ON, all the sampling data in the memory is cleared.

➢ Execute on Designated Window Opened

322 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
After checking this attribute, you can specify a window when the window is set to
open, the above "Pause control" and "clear control" to be effective.

If the “Execute on Designated Window Opened” is checked, you can specify a

window. When this window is opened, the settings of “Pause Control” and “Clear
Control” are valid.

• Sampling Mode

The Sampling mode can be "Cyclic" or "Triggered". The default is "Cyclic".

➢ Cyclic

The unit of the Sampling Cycle can be "s" or "0.1 s". The default is 1 s.

➢ Triggered

If you select the “Triggered” option, the data sampling will be done according to the
“Trigger Condition”. The Trigger Mode includes "Bit" and "Word". The “Address” is
needed to specify according to the Trigger Mode. The “Trigger Condition” of Bit Trigger
Mode can be "OFF→ ON", "ON→OFF" or "OFF↔ON". For Word Trigger Condition, you
can refer to:Detailed manual/General functions/Drawing/Logic Control.

• Data Record

You can save the sampling data to the HMI or other peripherals. The default is
“Unsave”. That is, the sampling data is not saved.

➢ Unsave

323 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
When you select “Unsave”, there will be a "Max Items" setting for the memory
occupation. The default is 1000. The maximum is 99,999. The "Auto Stop" is not
checked by fault. If the "Auto Stop" is checked, the new items will not be added when the
maximum number of items reached. Or delete the oldest items and add the new items. It
is shown as below.

Note:

All the sampled data will be lost if you select “Unsave”. After powering on, you need
to sample the data again.

➢ HMI
When you select “HMI” for the Data Record, the “Subdirectory Name” is required.

The “Maximum Saving Limit” option is set "0" Day by default. That means that there
is no limit to save. However, there is a limit because of the limited capacity of the HMI
Flash. It is suggested that the “Maximum Saving Limit” option is set several days when
you select HMI to save data, such as 15 days, 30 days, and so on.

The default action is “Delete Old Records” when the Flash memory of the HMI is full.
This is a cycle record mode. You can also select "Discard New Records" option. It is a
fixed-saving mode which the new records are no longer saved when the Flash memory
is full.

324 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

If you check the option “When frees pace is less than”, the action of “Notify Register”
will be done when the free space is less than the specified capacity. The capacity range
is 16KB ~ 2MB. You can set a bit register to notify. The bit register will be ON when the
free Flash capacity is less than the specified.

If you check the option “Clear Record Register”, you can specify a "bit register".
When the "bit Register" is ON, all the saved history records will be cleared.

For example, you want to save the data record to the “SAMPLE” folder in the HMI.
The bit register LB0 will be ON to indicate insufficient space when the free space is less
than 128KB. All saved history records will be deleted when the bit register LB1is set ON.
The settings are shown as below.

➢ SD Card and USB1

You can choose to save the data records to SD card or USB disk. The settings are
referred to the “HMI”.

4.10.2.8.2 Channel Setting

325 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The "Channel Settings" property TAB is shown as below.

There will be a red exclamation mark here due to no channel.

• Add channel

After clicking the button “Add”, an item will be added. It is shown as below.

The “Address” refers to the start address of the data record. The “Type” of data
record can be “16-bit Unsigned”, “16-bit Signed”, “32-bit Unsigned”, “32-bit Signed”, “16-
bit BCD”, “32-bit BCD”, “Single-precision Floating-point Number” or “Character String”.
The maximum memory occupied is 64 word registers for the type of “Character String”.

326 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

You can create many channels by clicking the button "Add". The addresses of the
data record are continuous and specified automatically. It is shown as below.

• Samples Each Time

The default value of “Samples Each Time” is 1. That means that one data is sampled
each time. When this parameter is set a value larger than 1, the addresses which each
channel occupies will multiply. For example, the option “Samples Each Time” is set 3.
Then the number of address occupied by each channel is shown as below.

327 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
In this example, LW0 ~ LW2 is occupied by the first channel, LW3 ~ LW8 is
occupied by the second channel, and LW9 ~ LW14 is occupied by the third channel. The
number of addresses is three times as the number which the “Samples Each Time” is set
1.

• Delete channel

You can delete the selected channel by clicking the button "Delete ".

• Notes

In the “Notes” column of each channel, you can give a description. The “Notes”
makes it easy to read and it will display in the "Historical Data" table. For example, the
first channel is "Liquid level", the second channel is "Pressure", and the third channel is
"Flow". It is shown as below.

• Sample Using Serial Address

You can set the non-serial address sampling channel if the option is not checked.

328 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Non-Serial Address Channel

Click the "Non-Serial Address Channel" button, then the "Non-Serial Address
Channel" page will display.

Add Word Channel:

Click the "Add Word Channel" button, there will be a entry of data sampling, then
you can click the address button to edit the address, then you can choose device and
address type. The length of the sampling points can be set by the option of ‘’Samples
Each Time’’. You can click the ‘’Add Word Channel’’ again, continue to add a channel,
the new channel address can be defined by yourself, and it does not need to continue
with the last channel address. As shown in the following figure:

329 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

It can be seen that the sampling addresses of multiple channels could be non-continuous
addresses.

Samples Each Time

The default is 1, which means 1 point per sample. When the value is set more than 1,
the sampling points of each channel is changed to the set value.

4.10.2.9 PLC Control

The "PLC Control" attribute is used to execute an action according to the change of
the address of the local HMI or the controller connected to the local HMI. This is a global
Attribute. That is, the action of the “PLC Control” will be executed regardless of which
one the current screen window is, as long as the conditions are met.

After clicking the menu command "Setup / System Settings / PLC Control", the "PLC
Control" settings page will be opened. It is shown as below.

330 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Click the button "Add" in the “PLC Control” settings page, the “PLC Control Details”
settings dialog will pop up. It is shown as below.

The “Control Type” refers to the action of the “PLC Control”. It includes “Switch
Basic Window”, “Report Current Window No.”, “Back Light Control”, “Execute Macro
Instruction”, “Audio Control”, “Sheet Print”, and “Force Buzzer off”.

331 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.10.2.9.1 Switch Basic Window

You can switch the basic window of the HMI by changing the value of a register.

• Valid on Window Opened

The “Valid on Window Opened” is a public attribute of the “PLC Control”. By default,
it is not checked. After checking this attribute, you can select a base window. The action
defined in the "PLC control" will be executed when the specified base window is
switched to open.

• Trigger Address

You can select a word register to trigger the “Switch Basic Window” action. For
example, if the “Trigger Address” is set LW100, the HMI will display the Basic Window(1)
when the value of LW100 is 1, and the HMI will automatically switch to the Basic
Window(20) when the value of LW100 is 20. And so on.

• Property

332 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
There are two optional attributes in the “Property” box. They are not checked by
default.

Turn on Back Light

If you check the option “Turn on Back Light”, the back light will be turned on
automatically when the action of “Switch Basic Window” is executed and the back light is
closed.

Clear Address on Switched Window

If you check the option “Clear Address on Switched Window”, the value of the word
register will be cleared to zero automatically after the action of “Switch Basic Window” is
finished.

After click the "OK" button, the “PLC Control” action will be added in the “ PLC
Control” settings page.

Note:

The “Switch Basic Window” action will be triggered only when the value of the
trigger address changes. You can also use a Bit Set component to switch the base
window in the LT Studio software. But the switch basic window action may not be
executed if you use the two switch window methods. For example, after you input a
value to the trigger address to switch the basic window, you switch another basic window
by using the Bit Set component. Then you input the same value to the trigger address to

333 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
switch the first basic window. But it does not act because the value of the trigger address
does not change. To avoid this situation, you should check the option "Clear Address on
Switched Window".

4.10.2.9.2 Report Current Window No.

The current window number can be recorded to a register.

• Trigger Address

You can select a word register to trigger the “Report Current Window No.” action.
For example, if the “Trigger Address” is set LW200, the number of the current basic
window will be moved to LW200 when the HMI displays a window. If the HMI device
displays the Basic Window (18), then the value of LW200 is equal to 18.

4.10.2.9.3 Back Light Control

You can define a trigger condition to control the state of the back light if you select
the “Back Light Control” as the control type.

334 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• Back Light on

The option “Back Light on” is selected by fault. If this option is selected and the
trigger condition is satisfied, the back light will be turned on when the back light is closed
or in the lowest lightness.

• Back Light off

If the option “Back Light off” is selected and the trigger condition is satisfied, the
back light will be turned off.

• Adjust to Lowest Brightness

If the option “Adjust to Lowest Brightness” is selected and the trigger condition is
met, the back light of the HMI will be adjusted to the lowest lightness.

• Trigger Address

The “Trigger Address” can be a word or bit register. It depends on the setting of the
"Trigger Condition".

• Trigger Condition

You can select “Bit”, “Word” or “Condition” for the “Trigger Condition”. If you select
“Bit” or “Word”, the condition is determined by the register which is given in the “Trigger
Address”. If you select “Condition”, the condition needs to be given by the logic control
editor box.

The detailed of “Condition” setting is referred to: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Drawing/ Logical Control.

335 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4.10.2.9.4 Execute Macro Instruction

• Execute Macro

You can select a Macro from the list. The selected Macro will be executed when the
Trigger Condition is achieved. If you have not created a Macro, there will be a red
exclamation mark to prompt that any one macro has not been established. Click the
button "Macro Code", you can open the Edit Macro window.

• Trigger Address

The “Trigger Address” can be a word or bit register. It depends on the setting of the
"Trigger Condition".

• Trigger Condition

The detailed of “Condition” setting is referred to: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Drawing/ Logical Control.

4.10.2.9.5 Audio Control

You can control the internal buzzer of the HMI or the audio from the “Audio Library”
by using the control type of “Audio Control”. This function is invalid if the audio output is
not supported by the HMI device.

336 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Buzzer

The option "Buzzer" is selected by default. If it is selected, the internal buzzer of the
HMI will ring when the trigger condition is satisfied. The “Buzzer Time” is used to set the
time of buzzer ringing. It is 1 second by default. The max value of the “Buzzer Time” is
100 seconds. When the “Buzzer Time” is set “0”, the buzzer will continue ringing until the
trigger condition is not satisfied.

• Use Audio

If the option “Use Audio” is selected, you can select an audio from the "Audio
Library". When the "Trigger condition" is satisfied, the audio will be played.

• Trigger Address

The “Trigger Address” can be a word or bit register. It depends on the setting of the
"Trigger Condition".

• Trigger Condition

The detailed of “Condition” setting is referred to: Detailed manual/ General functions/
Drawing/ Logical Control.

4.10.2.9.6 Force Buzzer off

337 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
You can specify a bit register to force the buzzer off by using the control type of
“Force Buzzer off”. When the state of the buzzer is ON, it will be forced to OFF if the
specified bit register is ON.

4.10.2.10 Alarm And Event

You can preset the attributes of the alarms or events such as the conditions and
contents in the “Alarm And Event” settings page. The “Alarm And Event” settings page
can be opened by clicking the menu command “Setup/System Settings/Alarm And
Event”.

4.10.2.10.1 Group

338 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The alarms and events can be viewed by groups. The users can customize the
groups. Here, the option “Group” can be set any one of “All, 1, 2, 3 …32”.

4.10.2.10.2 Language

The alarm content can be displayed in different languages. So you need select a
language for the option “Language” to view the alarm content.

4.10.2.10.3 Create and set

After selecting a Group, then click the button “Create”, the “Alarm and Event
Detailed Setting” window will pop up. It is shown as below.

339 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Group ID

If you select “All” for the “Group” in the settings page, the “Group ID” can set any
one of 1~32 here. If you select any one of 1~32 for the “Group” in the settings page, the
“Group ID” is same to the “Group”. It refers to the group of the alarm or event waiting for
be set here.

• Urgency Level

The “Urgency Level” can be set “High”, “Medium” or “Low”. You can set it
according to the priority level of the alarm or event.

• Trigger Condition

The trigger condition of the alarm or event can be set here by using the button
“Add”, “Modify” or “Delete”. The details can be referred to: Detailed manual/General
functions/Address editor/Standard Bit Address Input and Detailed manual/General
functions/Address editor/Standard Byte Address Input.

• Text and Record

➢ Description: Text Lib

You can input the description for the current alarm or event in the edit box here. Or
you can check the “Text Lib” and use a text of the Text Lib as the description. The “Text
Lib” is referred to: Detailed manual/Libray/Text Library.

➢ Language

340 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
You can select a language for the current display language here. If you check the
“Text Lib” and use a text in the Text Lib as the description, the content in the edit box will
only be viewed and not be edited. It can be viewed in different language by switching the
Language.

• Insert Watch Address

The display content of the alarm is the contents of the register address, the data
type of the address support the ‘’string’’ type.

341 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Audio

If the option “Trigger Buzzer” is checked, the internal buzzer of HMI will beep when
an alarm occurs. If the option “Buzzer Timeout” is checked, you can set the beeping time
of the buzzer. If the option “Audio” is checked, you can select an audio from the Audio
Library as the sound of the alarm or event.

You can try to hear the audio by Click the button ”.

• Action

There are three kinds of actions according to the status of the alarm or event. They
are “Triggering”, “Confirming” and “Recovery Action”. You can set the actions in different
status for the alarm or event by clicking the title of the setting page “Triggering”,
“Confirming” or “Recovery Action”.

342 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The actions of “Triggering” refers to the actions that they will be executed when the
alarm or event occurs. The actions of “Confirming” refers to the actions that they will be
executed when the alarm or event is acknowledged by manual. The actions of “Recovery
Action” refers to the actions that they will be executed when the alarm or event exists.

➢ Macro

Select a Macro to execute as an action. You can also open the Macro Editor by
clicking the button “Macro Code” or edit the Macro by clicking the button “Edit”.

➢ Bit Address

Set a bit register ON or OFF.

➢ Word Address

Write a value to a specified word register.

➢ Popup Window

Pop up a specified window.

➢ Print Information to Printer

Make the printer to print the corresponding information.

4.10.3 Communication Settings

4.10.3.1 Local Connection

The command “Local Connection” in the “Communication Settings” menu is used to

set the communication parameters of the COM ports.

343 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Select the corresponding COM port (COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4) property TAB
to set the communication parameters.

4.10.3.1.1 Unused

The option “Unused” is the default. It means the selected COM port is not used to
communicate.

4.10.3.1.2 Connect Device (Master)

The option “Connect Device (Master)” needs to be selected when the touch screen
is as master device. Then you need to set communication parameters for the
corresponding PLC.

• Manufacturer

The option “Manufacturer” is used to set the manufacturer of the connected PLC.

344 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Device Type

The Device Type refers to the corresponding type of the connected PLC.

• Pre-set Station No.

345 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The option “Pre-set Station No.” is used to set the PLC station number. You can set
it by Constant or Variable.

You can input a fixed station number of the connected PLC by Constant way. It is
the default station number for the new address. The station number which is already set
will not change if you modify the preset station number. You can use the button
“Synchronize Station No.” to unify the station number.

You can set the “Pre-set Station No.” by variable. It means the preset station
number will depend on the value of a variable which you can input by a numeric value
input component. The method to input the variable address is referred to: Detailed
manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard ByteAddress Input.

• Synchronize Station No.

After clicking the button “Synchronize Station No.”, the station number will be
modified and saved for all addresses of this PLC used in the current project.

• Communication Setting

➢ Communication Type: RS232, RS485-2 and RS485-4 are optional.

➢ Baud Rate:
110,300,600,1200,2400,4800,9600,14400,19200,38400,56000,57600,115200
and 187500 are optional.

➢ Data Bit: the number 7 and 8 are optional.

➢ Stop Bit: the number 1 and 2 are optional.

➢ Parity Bit: None, Odd and Even are optional.

➢ Reset: the default settings will be restored if you click the button “Reset”.

➢ Advance: more communication protocol parameters can be modified if you

click the button “Advance”. The settings are shown as below.

346 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The parameters in the Advanced Communication Settings should not be modified,

unless the professional guidance is given. The optional modification may result in a
communication failure or unexpected events occur. You can consult the factory technical
staff to modify the advanced parameters based on your needs. In most cases, the
default parameters are the best and need not to be changed.

4.10.3.1.3 Provide Service (Slave)

The touch screen is used as the slave device.

347 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
• Device Type

The Device Type includes Barcode, LT SLAVE and Modbus RTU Server. It is
shown as below.

• Device Alias

“Serve” is the default name of the Device Alias.

• Server Station No.

You can set the “Server Station No.” by Constant or Variable. It is the station
number of the touch screen as a slave device.

➢ Constant

The user can input a constant as the fixed station number.

➢ Variable

You can set the “Server Station No.” by variable. It means the server station
number will depend on the value of a variable which you can input by a numeric
value input component. The method to input the variable address is referred to:
Detailed manual/General functions/Address editor/Standard ByteAddress Input.

• Communication Setting

➢ Communication Type: RS232, RS485-2 and RS485-4 are optional.

➢ Baud Rate:
110,300,600,1200,2400,4800,9600,14400,19200,38400,56000,57600,115200
and 187500 are optional.

348 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
➢ Data Bit: the number 7 and 8 are optional.

➢ Stop Bit: the number 1 and 2 are optional.

➢ Parity Bit: None, Odd and Even are optional.

➢ Reset: the default settings will be restored if you click the button “Reset”.

➢ Advance: more communication protocol parameters can be modified if you

click the button “Advance”. The settings are shown as below.

The parameters in the Advanced Communication Settings should not be modified.

The optional modification may result in a communication failure or unexpected events
occur. You can consult the factory technical staff to modify the advanced parameters
based on your needs.

4.10.3.2 Remote Connection

The Remote connection contains three connection modes: "Remote HMI", "Remote
PLC" and "Ethernet PLC".

4.10.3.2.1 Remote HMI

After click the menu "Setup / Communication Settings / Remote Connection", the
"Remote HMI" settings page is opened as the default. It is shown as below.

349 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

For one of the HMI device, anyone of other HMI devices in the same Ethernet
network of the LAN is the Remote HMI. For example, there are two HMI: one named
HMI1, another one named HMI2. These two HMI devices are connected in an Ethernet
network. For HMI1 device, HMI2 is the "remote HMI" of HMI. For HMI2 device, HMI is
the "remote HMI" of HMI2.

After clicking the button "Add" in the “Remote HMI” settings page, the “Remote HMI”
settings dialog will pop up. It is shown as below.

• Use IP

350 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
You can set the IP address of the remote HMI by Fixed or Variable. The default
setting mode is “Fixed”. And the default fixed IP address is “192.168.0.1”. For example,
the IP address of HMI1 is “192.168.0.10” and the IP address of HMI2 is “192.168.0.20”.
For the project of HMI1, you need set the IP address of the remote HMI “192.168.0.20”.

When you set the IP address of the remote HMI by Variable, a word register
address needs to be given as the start address. There are 4 word registers which is from
the start word register. They are used to save the 4 segments of the IP address. It is
shown as below.

You can input the IP address of the Remote HMI to the4 word registers by the
numeric value input component. Then you can access the desired HMI device.

• Port No.

You can set the “Port No.” of the remote HMI by Constant or Variable. The default
setting mode is “Constant” and the default port number is 3000. You need to set the
“Port No.” by Variable if you want to change the port number of the remote HMI by a
word register. The default port number is suggested usually. It is noted that all the port
numbers of the connected HMI devices must be the same. Otherwise, the connection
may fail.

• Device Type

The Device Type refers to the type of the remote HMI device which the HMI needs
to access.

• Device Alias

The default of the Device Alias is "Device1". It cannot be null. You can set a device
alias which is easy to understand, such as "HMI for Machine 3".

351 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Click the button "OK" to confirm the settings. And the "Remote HMI" settings page is
shown as below.

Click the button "OK" in the “Remote HMI” settings page to save, and then you can
find the remote HMI device in the Device list of the register address. For example, it is
shown as below.

After finishing setting the "Remote HMI", the local HMI can access all the registers
of the "Remote HMI", including the LW, RW, SRW, LB, SRB and other registers.

352 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
If you need to add other remote HMIs, you can add them by referring to the above.

4.10.3.2.2 Remote PLC

The Remote PLC refers to the device which is connected with the remote HMI,
including the PLC, the inverter, the servo, the instrument, and so on.

After clicking the menu "Setup / Communication Settings / Remote Connection", the
"Remote HMI" settings page is opened as the default. Click the "Remote PLC" tab to
open the "remote PLC" settings page. It is shown as below.

After clicking the button "Add" in the “Remote PLC” settings page, the “Remote
PLC” settings dialog will pop up. It is shown as below.

353 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Remote HMI Address

➢ Use IP

You can set the IP address of the remote HMI by Fixed or Variable. The default
setting mode is “Fixed”. And the default fixed IP address is “192.168.0.1”.

➢ Port No.

You can set the “Port No.” of the remote HMI by Constant or Variable. The default
setting mode is “Constant” and the default port number is 3000.

The detailed settings of “Use IP” and “Port No.” can be referred to the settings in the
"Remote HMI" settings page.

• COM

➢ At COM port

The “At COM port” refers to the number of COM port which the “Remote PLC”
device is connected to. The default is COM1. For example, the “At COM port” is set
COM2 if the accessed controller is connected to the COM2 port.

➢ Manufacturer

The “Manufacturer” refers to the manufacturer of the connected "Remote PLC"

device.

➢ Device Type

354 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The Device Type refers to the type of the remote PLC device which is connected to
the remote HMI.

➢ Device Alias

The default of the Device Alias is "Device1". It cannot be null. You can set a device
alias which is easy to understand, such as "HMI for Machine 3".

➢ Default Station No.

The "Default Station No." refers to the station number of the Remote PLC device. It
must be consistent with the actual station number of the Remote PLC device.

➢ Advance

Please refer to the “Advance” settings of the "Local Connection".

For example, the “Remote PLC” device is connected to the “Remote HMI” which the
IP address is “192.168.0.20”. The type of the remote PLC is Siemens S7-200 and the
COM1 of the remote HMI is used to connect with the PLC. The station number of the
PLC is 2. The settings are shown as below.

Click the button "OK" to confirm the settings and the "Remote PLC" device is added
to the “Remote PLC” settings page.

355 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

You can find the remote PLC device in the "Device Type" of the component. For
example, it is shown as below.

After finishing setting the "Remote PLC", the local HMI can access all the registers
of the "Remote PLC" which is connected to the “Remote HMI”.

If you need to add other remote PLCs, you can add them by referring to the above.

4.10.3.2.3 Ethernet PLC

356 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “Ethernet PLC” refers to the PLC which is connected with the HMI by the
Ethernet communication mode. The network communication protocols which the HMI
and the PLC support are used to complete the communication.

After clicking the menu "Setup / Communication Settings / Remote Connection", the
"Remote HMI" settings page is opened as the default. Click the "Ethernet PLC" tab to
open the "Ethernet PLC" settings page. It is shown as below.

After click the button "Add" in the “Ethernet PLC” settings page, the “Ethernet PLC”
settings dialog will pop up. It is shown as below.

• The IP address of Ethernet PLC

The IP address of Ethernet PLC refers to the IP address of the PLC which is
connected with the HMI through the Ethernet network.

• Port No.

357 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The “Port No.” is the number of the communication port between the Ethernet PLC
and the HMI. The “Port No.” is different for the different network. There is a default “Port
No.” for your selected network. Generally, it is ok to use the default port number. For
example, the default port number is 502 for the "Modbus TCP".

The "Manufacturer", "Device Type", "Device Alias," "Default Station No." are same
as the settings in the "Remote PLC".

• Broadcast Station

After checking the “Broadcast Station”, you can set a number for the broadcast
station. The default is that the “Broadcast Station” is not checked. You can determine to
use this function or not according to the actual situation.

Click the button "OK" to confirm the settings and the "Ethernet PLC" device is added
to the “Ethernet PLC” settings page. For example, the “Modbus TCP” is selected as the
device type. The result of settings is shown as below.

If you need to add other Ethernet PLCs, you can add them by referring to the above.

You can realize the connections by using the “Ethernet PLC” mode, such as multi
HMIs, multi HMIs and one PLC, multi HMIs and multi PLCs, and other connections.

4.10.3.3 Service

Service refers to that the HMI device provides the data requested by other devices.
The HMI is a slave device. The port is static. All communication operations should be
initiated by other master devices.

358 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The type of Service includes Serial Port Service and Network Service.

4.10.3.3.1 Serial Port Service

The Device Type can be Barcode, LTSLAVE and Modbus RTU Server. The Barcode
refers to the bar code gun. It can scan information and display it by using a continuous
100 characters saved in the area which LW8900 is the start address.
LB8999,which is as a flag bit, is set ON after scanning is finished (it will not be reset
automatically). The LT SLAVE device is supported and the HMI can work as a slave or a
master device. The Modbus RTU Server is referred to: Detailed

359 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
manual/Setup/Communication Settings/Local Connection/Provide Service (Slave).

4.10.3.3.2 Network service

The Service Protocol Type supports Modbus TCP Server. It is referred to: Ethernet
Service

4.10.4 Options
The command “Options” in the “Setup” menu opens the Options dialog. You can
view and modify some settings such as the LT Studio software interface display.
There are two catalogs: General and HMI.

4.10.4.1 General

The General has only one option: Auto Update. If the “Check for Updates” is
checked in the Auto Update sub catalog, the LT Studio software will be checked for
updates automatically when it is opened. A message will be popped up to remind you to
update if the software detects update packages.

360 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Auto Update: Click this option then the software will update automatically every time
you open it, if there is a installation package, it will hint you to install it.

UI Language: You can set the UI language of FStudio, and it will take effect after
completing setting and restarting

4.10.3.2 Hmi

The catalog of “Hmi” includes “General”, “Auto Recover” and “Window”.

4.10.3.3.1 General

361 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
If you check the “Automatically load the previously closed project” option, the last
closed project will be opened automatically when the LT Studio software is opened.

4.10.3.3.2 Auto Recover

You can set the “Recover Time Interval” here. For example, the “Recover Time
Interval” is set as 2 minutes means that the project will be saved automatically every two
minutes. This setting can reduce the project information losing when the software
accidentally shutdown or the power failure is occurred.

You can open the file folder “Backup Projects” by clicking the button “View backup
project”.

362 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.10.3.3.3 Window

The sub catalog “Window” includes two options: General and the Designer. The
option of “General” is blank.

If you check the “Use pipeline animation effect” in the “Designer” option, you can
see the dynamic liquid flow effect in the pipeline component during the project editing
process.

4.11 Tools

In the LT Studio software, the Tools menu includes many tools in the shortcut tool
bar. It includes” Compile, Compile All, Clear Compile Result, Download, Pack to Disk,
Upload, Decompile, and Offline Simulation”.

363 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

1 Compile

The project will be saved automatically and the system will generate a bin directory
and other files if no errors.

2Compile All

The project will be saved automatically and all the files are forced to compile.

3Download
The system will compile the project automatically and generate a directory of upload
and some relevant files for decompiling. Then the relevant files are packaged and the
download tool dialog is popped up. Before clicking the button “Download”, you need to
select the communication mode (USB or Ethernet) and the data source (Project or Fpg
File). You can check the delete options and check the download options (Batch Mode or
Force Mode) according to demands.

4 Pack to Disk
The tool of “Pack to Disk” can realize compiling the project and packaging it to the
disk. The package file is named Fpg File. Then you can download it by the USB disk or
the LT Studio software.

364 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

5 Upload
If you check “Upload” to enable upload in the Global Settings of the System
Settings, the configuration information downloaded in the HMI device can be uploaded
by the USB or Ethernet communication mode. The configuration information can be
Project, RW Data, Recipe or Logs.

6 Decompile

365 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The Fpg File can be decompiled to project if you check “Decompilation” to enable
decompile function in the Global Settings of the System Settings

7 Offline Simulation
The tool of the “Offline Simulation” is used to simulate the project running in offline.

4.12 Help

In the LT Studio software, the Help menu includes: Online Help, Help, Check for
Updates, and About(software version).

366 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

1 Online Help
You can find the online help when you click the command “Online Help”.

2 Check for Updates

The LT Studio software will be updated by using the internet when you click the
menu command “Check for Updates”.

3 About
The current LT Studio software version information and copyright declaration will
be displayed when you click the menu command “About”.

4.13 General functions

4.13.1 Address editor

4.13.1.1 Standard Bit Address Input

In the software LT Studio, the "Standard Bit Address Input" function will be used

367 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
frequently. By this function, you can input the bit address which is connected with a
device, and the value of the bit address will be displayed. The function can easily realize
the connection with each PLC. The “Standard Bit Address Input” window is as shown as
below.

In the LT Studio software, the corresponding bit address symbols are given
according to the various connected devices. For the LT FL2N series PLC, X represents
the input address, Y represents the output address, M represents the middle register
address, SM represents the system special bit address, and S represents the state
address. As shown as below.

If the address is not connected with the device after you input a specific address
number, you should check whether the parameters (such as Device, Station No. and
Address) are set correctly. For example, these parameters are set as follows.

368 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

If you find the data refresh rate is a little slow, you can change the communication
rate as follows.

Certainly, you can use the address tag library. You need to prepare the data
addresses in the address tag library before using them. Check the “Use Address Tag” in

the “Standard Bit Address Tag” window and click the button ” to open the “Address
Tag Library” window. Select the bit address you need in the address tag library, as
shown as follows.

369 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The “Bit-index within a Byte Register” function can be used. You need to check the
“Bit-index within a Byte Register”, as shown as below.

You can use the Address Index function. This function can change the bit address
which is connected with the current component according to the value of a word address.
For example, the bit address LB0 is connected with the current component. If you check
the Address Index and set the address as LW0, as shown as below, the bit address which
is connected with the current component will be LB (0 + LW0).

370 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

In addition, you can use the System Register in the Standard Bit Address Input
window. When you click the System Register button, the System Special Function
Register window will pop up. There are many system special function register addresses
in this window, as shown as follows. You can quickly select one to use.

Certainly, the screen is connected with multiple slaves at sometime. The station
number is varied. At this moment, you need to use the Index function. This function uses
a word address to provide a variable station number. The setting process is shown as
follows.

371 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.13.1.2 Standard Byte Address Input

In the software LT Studio, the "Standard Byte Address Input" function will be used
frequently. By this function, you can input the byte or word address which is connected
with a device and the value of this address will be displayed. The function can easily
realize the connection with each PLC. The “Standard Byte Address Input” window is as
shown as below.

In the LT Studio software, the corresponding byte or word address symbols are
given according to the various connected devices. For the Leadshine M2_Serial PLC,D
represents the data register, SD represents the special address, represents the timer,
C_word represents the 16-bits counter which saves the current value, and C_dword
represents the 32-bits counter which saves the current value. As shown as below.

372 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

If the address is not connected with the device after you inputting a specific address
number, you should check whether the parameters (such as Device, Station No. and
Address) are set correctly. For example, these parameters are set as follows.

If you find the data refresh rate is a little slow, you can change the communication
rate as follows.

373 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Certainly, you can use the address tag library. You need to prepare the data
addresses in the address tag library before using them. Check the “Use Address Tag” in

the “Standard Byte Address Tag” window and click the button ” to open the “Address
Tag Library” window. Select the byte or word address you need in the address tag
library, as shown as follows.

You can use the Address Index function. This function can change the byte or word
address which is connected with the current component according to the value of a word
address. For example, the word address D0 is connected with the current component. If
you check the Address Index and set the address as LW0, as shown as below, the word
address which is connected with the current component will be D (0 + LW0).

374 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

In addition, there are many system special function register addresses. You can
quickly select one by clicking the button “System Register”, as shown as follows.

Certainly, the screen is connected with multiple slaves at sometime. The station
number is varied. At this moment, you need to use the Index function. This function uses
a byte or word address to provide a variable station number. The setting process is
shown as follows.

375 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.13.2 Drawing

4.13.2.1 Border settings

After double-click the figure you have drawn, you can view and select border color
and style.

You can select the line width and the line type from the lists.

You can change the border color by using the list or the button ”.

376 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.13.2.2 Filling settings

After double-click the figure you have drawn, you can view and select the fill type
and the fill color.

There are three fill types: Solid Color, Pattern and Gradient.

1 Solid Color

In this fill type, you can select a kind of color for the background of the figure from

the list or by using the tool button “ ”.

2 Pattern

377 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

In this fill type, you can select a kind of color for the background and another kind of
color for the foreground. You can set the pattern filling effect, too.

3 Gradient

In the gradient fill type, you can select the background color, the foreground color,
gradual approach and gradient filling effect.

4.13.3Font settings

1 Vector Font

378 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
According to the font attributes setting, change the characters of the text into a
TrueType font file (ttf format) for HMI.
▪ Disadvantages
▪ Only support the TrueType font type (ttf format) which the current
operating system has installed.
▪ The below is the font effect comparison between the tows that
the "Disable Vector Font Bordline Blurring Processing" is not checked and
the "Disable Vector Font Bordline Blurring Processing" is checked.

Note: the "Disable Vector Font Bordline Blurring Processing" can be set in the path:
Project/Local HMI/System Settings/Extended Settings.

▪ Advantages
▪ Occupy Less memory. The same character in the same font type
uses one font data regardless of size, color, bold, or italic.

379 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
▪ Full size and can be set freely without distortion.
▪ Supports multi-line text alignment.
▪ Text Library supports the use of vector fonts.
2 Graphical Font
Regard the string as a whole and save it as a bitmap to the project.
▪ Disadvantages
▪ Occupy more memory because of the bitmap storage format.
▪ Advantages
▪ Supports all the fonts installed in the current operating system.
▪ Display effect is good.
3 Equivalent width
Each single font displays in the max width size. The max width of the font is
greater if the font size is greater.
▪ For example, the max width of a single digit is 17 and the max width of a
single character is 22 if the font size is 16,
4 Font
You can set the font type from the list. It supports all font types installed in
the current operating system, such as Microsoft Sans Serif.
5 Size
You can set the current font size. The range is from 8 to 144.
The font supports bold and italic, and you can modify the font color from the

list or by using the tool button ”.

6 Multi-line Alignment
It is only valid for multiple lines text. You can set the multiple lines text align
to the left, center or right.
7 Advanced
You can set the Horizontal Scaling, Space, and Shadow Effects after
clicking the button “Advanced”.

8 Position
You can set the font position of the current components.

4.13.4 Graphic edit

380 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

1 The Current Project Graphics Library

For some components, you can find the property TAB of “Graphics”. In this TAB,
you can view the component graphics in the Current Project Graphics Library. Select
one, then you can preview the status of it in the Status Preview window.
2 Import
The system graphics library can be opened by clicking the button “Import”. You
can select a system graphic into the current project graphics library here.
3 Add a new Graphic
Click the button “Add a new Graphic” to pop up the window “Add New Graphics”
(see Figure a). Then you can set the properties of the new graphic, such as “Name",
“Status Count”, “Width”, “Height” and other information. After clicking the button “OK”
to confirm it and closing all the pop-up windows, you can see that an editable window
with the same name is already opened (see Figure b). You can edit the new graphic
in this window. Refer to: Detailed manual/Library/Graphics Library/Add graphics.

381 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
4 Favorites

After clicking the button “Favorites”, you can add the current selected graphic to
a specified Favorites Category. The Favorites Category can be selected, added and
renamed (see Figure a).Click the button “OK” to confirm the addition to the Favorites
Category. You can view the graphics collected in the Favorites Category by the path:
Project/ Library/Graphics Library/Browse Graphics Library (see Figure b).

b
5 Graphics Edit
After clicking the button “Edit Graphics” and closing all the pop-up windows, you
can see that an editable window with the same name of the graphic is already
opened (see Figure a).The graphic can be edited in this window. Refer to:
Project/Library/ Graphics Library/Add graphics.

6 Shadow Effect
Double click the graphic you have drawn in the Graphics Edit window to modify
the properties of it. After checking the Shadow Effect (see Figure a), you can add the
shadow effect for the selected graphic (see Figure b).

382 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

b.
7 Border
You can change the outer border color of the current selected graphic. Note:
Only when the elected graphic is vector graphic and this attribute can be modified,
this option is valid to change the outer border color (see Figure a)!

8 Fill
You can change the filling effect of the current selected graphic (see Figure a).
Note: Only when the elected graphic is vector graphic and this attribute can be
modified, this option is valid (see Figure b)!

383 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

4.13.5 Control settings

For some components, there is a property TAB of “Control Settings”.

①Activation Settings
• Always
The current component can always be operated if you use the option “Always”.

• Conditional
➢ Indicating Invalid Mark

384 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

After checking the option “Indicating Invalid Mark”, the prohibited mark will display
on the component if the operating conditions are not met. The prohibited mark is shown
as below.

➢ Hide when conditions are not met.

When you check the option “Hide when conditions are not met”, the component will hide if
the operating conditions are not met.
➢ Automatic pop-up password window

385 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

If you check the option “Automatic pop-up password window”, the user login window will
pop up when you click the component. It is shown as below.

• Level User

386 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
After checking this function, you need to enter the appropriate user level password
to operate the device. It is shown as below.

• Privilege User

After checking this function, you need to login by using the corresponding user
privilege to operate the component. It is shown as below.

387 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Logic control

After check this function, the component can be operated when the specified
conditions are satisfied. The conditions can be multiple logical operations.

②Security Settings
• Minimum Press Time

388 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

You need to hold the button component for a specified time to perform actions. The
function is used to avoid the action due to touching the screen by mistake.

• Require confirmation prior to execution

If this function is checked, a confirmation dialog box will pop up auto matically. It will
keep the display status for the “Waiting Time” if you don’t confirm or cancel it. It is shown
as below.

389 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Records Operation

If you check this function, you can record the operations of the component and
display the records in the operator Log. It is shown as below.

• Minimum Operation Interval

390 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

By using the “Minimum Operating Interval” function, continuous actions can be

avoided in a short time due to touching the screen continuously by mistake.

4.13.6 Display
① Position

• Position and size

You can set X and Y coordinate values of the component to change the display
position of it. You can modify the width and the height of the component to change the
size of it.

• Locked

391 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The position and size of the component cannot be changed if you check the “Locked”
function. And there is a small lock icon on the component in the editing window. It is
shown as below.

②Always Display

If you select the “Always Display” function, the component will always be visible
when the project is running. It is the default setting.

③Conditional Display
• Level User

392 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

If you check this function, the component will be visible after you entering the
appropriate user level password.

• Privilege User

If you check this function, the component will be visible after you login by using the
corresponding user privilege.

• Logic Control

393 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

If you check this function, the component can be controlled to display according to
the logic condition. The condition can be multiple logical operations.

4.13.7 Keyboard setting

For some components, there is a property TAB of “Keyboard Setting”.

①Mode
• Touch Control

The keyboard will be popped up if you click the HMI input component.

• Bit control

A bit register is used to control the keyboard to pop up or close.

394 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
②Keyboard Settings
• Use pop-up keyboard

You can select the Keyboard Type from the system-provided keyboard types.

➢ Auto adjust position

The position of the pop-up keyboard is adjusted automatically according to the

position of the HMI input component.

➢ Pop-up position

A relative region in HMI is specified to pop up the keyboard.

395 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

➢ Specified Position

The position to pop up the keyboard is specified by the X and Y coordinates.

• Don’t use pop-up keyboard:

If you need to use an external keyboard or a keypad which is designed by using the
FS software, you should select the option “Don’t use pop-up keyboard

③Use input order function

This function can be used to input the values into multiple input components
continuously according to a specified order. You can check it when there are many input
components.

396 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

• Input without order after input finished

The function of “Use input order function” will be canceled after you finish the input
of multiple input components.

• Input Order

You can set the input order for the current input component here. The
multiple components in one group can be input according to the order number,
from small to large.
• Group

You can divide the input components into several groups and finish the
input according to the input order in the current group.

4.13.8 Label
Adding a label for a component can be increased readability. You can setthe
properties of the label such as the language, the content, the font type and other settings.
The display text will change when the status is switched if you set different text for different
status.

397 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

1 Language
Select a language for label edit. The settings will only take effect in the selected language.
2 Language Independent
When you change the language, the label content is not affected.
3 Use Text Library
After the “Use Text Library” is checked, the label content will be filled by the selected text
entry in the text library. Some common text can be ready in the text library.
4 Use Label
You need to check this option when you want to set a label for the component.
5 Tag Content
You can edit a label for the current status here. So you edit the label in the tag content edit
box, you should select the status first on the lower right corner. Then, click the next status to edit
the next status label.

The text in the Tag Content edit box can be copied to all languages, all status or all languages
and all status.

398 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

6 Label attributes
You can set the attributes for each Tag Content such as the font type, the size, the color, the
alignment type, the Advanced Settings (Scaling, Space, and Shadow Effects) and other attributes.
The function of “Copy text to” can avoid duplication of work. And you can also import from
favorite font template to simplify label attributes editing. It is efficient and convenient.
7 Vector Font and Graphic Font

• Vector Font

According to the font attributes setting, change the characters of the text into a TrueType
font file (ttf format) for HMI.
➢ Disadvantages
▪ Only support the TrueType font type (ttf format) which the current
operating system has installed.
▪ The below is the font effect comparison between the tows that
the "Disable Vector Font Bordline Blurring Processing" is not checked and
the "Disable Vector Font Bordline Blurring Processing" is checked.

Note: the "Disable Vector Font Bordline Blurring Processing" can be set in the path:

399 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Project/Local HMI/System Settings/Extended Settings.
➢ Advantages
▪ Occupy Less memory. The same character in the same font type uses
one font data regardless of size, color, bold, or italic.
▪ Full size and can be set freely without distortion.
▪ Supports multi-line text alignment.
▪ Text Library supports the use of vector fonts.

• Graphical Font

Regard the string as a whole and save it as a bitmap to the project.

➢ Disadvantages
▪ Occupy more memory because of the bitmap storage format.
➢ Advantages
▪ Supports all the fonts installed in the current operating system.
▪ Display effect is good.
8 Marquee
In the LT Studio software, every label of the component can be set to display by scrolling the
fonts. The scrolling direction, step length, speed, etc. can be set separately.

4.13.9 Marquee
The function of “Marquee” is to display text by scrolling the fonts. The components
such as "Label" and "Static Text" have the “Marquee” function.

400 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
When you check the "Marquee" option for the label or the static text ,the fonts will
display by scrolling. You can set the attributes such as the Moving Direction, Step Length
and Pix Speed. The setting is shown as below.

1 Moving Direction
There are four moving direction: Left To Right, Right To Left, Top To Bottom and
Bottom To Top. Select one to be the moving direction of fonts scrolling.

2 Step Length
The fonts scroll step by step. The distance of two steps is Step Length. The unit of
Step Length is pixel. For example, setting Step Length 10 means that the fonts move 10
pixels per second.

401 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
3 Pix Speed
The option “Pix Speed” is used to set the moving speed of fonts scrolling. The unit of
Pix Speed is 0.1 seconds. The range of Pix Speed is from 1 to 255. For example, setting
PixSpeed10 means that the moving speed of fonts scrolling is 1 second. The process will
be circulated after all fonts move out in the component size range.

4.13.10 Logic Control

You can find the function of “Logic Control” if you select the option “Conditional” in the
“Control Settings” property TAB of some component. Or you can find it if you select the
option “Conditional Display” in the “Display” property TAB. You can also find it if you select
the option “Condition” in the “Trigger and Stop” property TAB of the Timer component.
This function can realize all kinds of logic operations or judgment easily and can reduce
using macros.

402 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

There is a red exclamation mark due to no logic condition. Now click the button
"Add", you can pop up the Condition Setting dialog.

There are two address types: Bit Register and Word Register. The default selection
is Bit Register. The logic condition judgment for Bit Register is "ON" or "OFF". The

default selection is “ON”. Click the tool button " "or double-click the "Address" blank
box, you can edit and select a "bit register". For example, set the address of “Bit
Register" LB0, and set the Condition "ON". It is shown as below.

403 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The red exclamation mark will disappear after you select an address for the condition.
Click the button “OK” and the condition will be added to the Logic Control list. It is shown
as below. It means the current component will be valid when the bit register LB0 is ON.

If the condition is not enough, you can continue to add. For example, the condition
“LW0 > 1” need to be added. You can click the button “Add” to go on the operation. The
Word Register is selected and the address is set LW0. The condition is set “LW0 > 1”. The
setting is shown as below.

There are two pop-down lists in the Condition setting area. The first list is used to
select the compare relationship. The compare relationship symbols include "<", ">", "<="
"> =", "==" and "! =". The second list is used to add the next condition of the word
register LW0. The default of the second list is “None”. It means that there is not the next
condition any more. You can select "AND" or "OR" in the second list. It means the
relationship between the current condition and the next condition.

404 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The setting is shown as below if you select “AND” in the second list.

If the conditions you need is "LW0> 100" and "LW0 <LW1", then the condition of the
second is not "constant" but "variable" and the address is LW1. The setting is shown as
below.

After click the button "OK", you can add this condition to the Logic Control list. It is
shown as below.

405 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

There is a relationship option in front of the second condition in the Logic Control
list. The option can be set “AND” or “OR”. It means the logic relationship between the
previous condition and the following condition. The component can be operated or
display only if the result of all the conditions logic operation is true.

There are the button “Modify” and the button “Delete” besides the button “Add” in the
Logic Control list. After selecting a condition in the Logic Control list, you can click the
button "Modify" to edit it again or click the button “Delete” to remove it from the Logic
Control list. You can also double-click a condition in the Logic Control list to modify it.

Note: the conditions are executed sequentially from the top to the bottom in the
Logic Control list when the conditions are more.

4.13.11 Shadow Effect

You can set the property “Shadow Effect “for the vector graphics, the bitmaps, the
graphics, the fonts, and so on. It is shown as below.

406 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
After checking the "Shadow Effect", the setting options such as Color and Shadow
Excursion will be displayed. Otherwise the options are not visible.

1 Color
You can use the color palette to set the shadow color.

You can also use the tool “ ” to set the shadow color.

2 Shadow Excursion
The Shadow Excursion includes the X-axis (horizontal) direction offset and the Y
axis (vertical) direction offset. The unit is pixel.

Note:

• The coordinates in this software refer to: Detailed manual/General

functions/Drawing/ Position.

• The range of Shadow Excursion is: -16 to 16.The positive number for X-axis
represents the shadow direction is to the right. The positive number for Y-axis
represents the shadow direction is downward. The negative number represents
the contrary direction.

The display results are shown as below.

4.13.12 Position
Every component has the property of “Position”. You can find it in the “General”

407 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
property TAB or the “Display” property TAB of the component.

The “X” and “Y” in the Position property are used to set the x coordinate and the y
coordinate of the start point of the current component in the window. The title of the “X”
and “Y” is “Fixed Point” or “Position”. The title of "Fixed Point” decides a fixed point as
the start point of the component. The detail is referred to: Detailed manual/ General
functions/ Drawing/ Rotation.The title of "Position" decides the point in the upper left
corner of the component as the start point.

Note:

In this software, the coordinate system is shown as below. The origin point is in the
upper left corner. The X-axis is horizontal direction. The positive direction of the X-axis is
to the right. The Y-axis is vertical direction. The positive direction of the Y axis is
downward.

408 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

The properties of “Width” and “Height” are used to set the width and the height of
the component. If the option is grey and not editable, it represents the attribute is not
available. It is shown as below.

If you check the option “Locked”, the position of the component will be locked. Its
position and size cannot be edited. A lock mark will display in the upper left corner of the
component when you select it in the configuration window.

4.13.13 Rotation

The function of “Rotation” can adjust the display angle of the components such as
static graphics, vector graphics and other components. This function is a static function.
That is, the display angel is not adjusted in the HMI if you set the display angle in the
“Rotation” property. If you want to dynamically adjust the display angle of the graphics,
please refer to: Detailed manual/General functions/Dynamic Graphics.

1 Fix Point
Each figure has nine fixed points. The middle fixed point is selected as the default by
the system. You can change the fixed point. The result is different after the figure rotates

409 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
around the different fixed point. For example, a rectangle rotates the center fixed point and
another rectangle rotates the upper left fixed point. It is shown as below.

2 Rotation Angle
The Rotation Angle is used to set the clockwise rotation angle of the component.
This angle range is 0-360 degrees.

3 Non Rotation
You can quickly set the display angle to zero by clicking the button “Non Rotation”.

4.13.14 Dynamic Graphics

There is a property TAB of “Dynamic Graphics” for some component such as the
static picture component, the vector graphics, and so on.

You can use the function of “Dynamic Graphics” if you want to adjust the position,
the size and the rotation angle of the figure dynamically during running the HMI.

The function of dynamic graphics is realized by using the registers to control the
position, the size, and the rotation angle of the figure dynamically.

①Use Dynamic Graphics

You need to check the option “Use Dynamic Graphics” in the property TAB of
“Dynamic Graphics” if you want to use the dynamic graphics function.

②Control Address

410 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The start address of the control registers is selected here. The start control register
address editing is referred to: Detailed manual/General function/Address editor/Standard
ByteAddress Input.

③Control Position
The option of "Control Position" needs to be checked if you want to adjust the
position of the component dynamically. Two registers are used. The addresses will be
set and displayed automatically after the “Control Address” is given. These two registers
will control the absolute coordinates of the fixed point of the component on the screen
window. The touch screen coordinate system is referred to: Detailed manual/General
function/Drawing/Position.

④Control Size
The option of "Control Size" needs to be checked if you want to adjust the size of
the component dynamically. Two registers are used. The addresses will be set and
displayed automatically after the “Control Address” is given. These two registers will
control the width and the height of the component. The register to control the width is
valid for the components which the width and the height are equal, such as the square
and the circle.

⑤Control Rotating
The option of "Control Rotating" needs to be checked if you want to adjust the
rotation angle of the component dynamically. One registers is used. The address will be
set and displayed automatically after the “Control Address” is given. The register will
control the clockwise rotation angle of the component. This angle range is 0-360degrees.

Note:

The position, size, and rotating control are based on the "fixed point" of the
component. The fixed point is referred to: Detailed manual/General
function/Drawing/Rotation.

4.13.15 Table Drawing

You can find the property TAB “Table”.

411 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

You can change the background color and the title bar background color.

You can change the outline style, the split line style, the line width and the line color.

You can display the grid line after check the “Row Split Line” and the “Column Split
Line”. It is shown as below.

412 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

You can hide the grid line if you don’t check the “Row Split Line” and the “Column
Split Line”. It is shown as below.

4.13.16 Export CSV

You can use the function of “Export CSV” if you want to export the list data to a CSV
format file. You can find the option “Export CSV” in the “Search” or “Checking” property
TAB of the list component, such as the Historical Data Display component and the
Operator Log component.

413 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

①Trigger Registrator
A bit register is used to trigger the action of exporting data to a CSV file. Exporting is
triggered when the bit register changed from OFF to ON. You can use a bit toggle switch
to control the bit register. The method to input the trigger register address is referred to:
Detailed manual/General function/Address editor/Standard Bit Address Input.

②Export to designated location

The function of “Export to designated location” supports exporting the CSV file to HMI,
SD card or USB disk. The corresponding options are: HMI, SD, USB1.

③Subdirectory name
You can give a sub directory name for the exporting location.

The contents saved in the designated registers will provide the sub directory name if
you check the option “Sub directory name” and give the start register address.

Note:

Please use the character component to input the sub directory name if you use
registers to provide it. The method to input the register is referred to: Detailed
manual/General function/Address editor/Standard ByteAddress Input.

④Export progress indicator register

414 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
A register can be given to display the exporting progress if the data is large. It is
shown as below.

The exporting progress uses the percentage of completion (0-100) to represent. You
can use a numeric value display component or a bar graph component to display.

⑤Export CSV method

The Export CSV method can be “Export by day” or “Single File”. If you select the
“Export by day”, the exported data will be saved in different files by date. If you select the
“Single File”, the exported data will be saved in a single file.

If you select “Single File”, you can use the function of “User-defined File Name”. The
system will name the exported file according to the default name rules when the option
“User-defined File Name” is not checked. A register address needs to be specified to
save the file name which is input when it is needed.

Please use the character input component to input the user-defined file name. The
file name length is limited to 32 ASCII characters or 16 Chinese characters.

Note:

This operation will export all entries in the current condition. If you use the function
of “Enable Search Function”, the current result of searching will be exported.

5 Use topic

5.1 Find and Replace

415 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

5.2 Outline

It will display all components of the current work window in the “Outline” window.

The tool button “ ” on the top right corner which is used to control the display mode of

the outline window. The tool button “ ” is used to make the outline window show or auto hide.

The tool button ” is used to close the outline window.

416 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Note:

You can check “Outline” from the “View” menu and make the outline window display again
after the Outline window is closed.
You can find the component by inputting the component name in the blank text box on the
top of the outline window and click the “Enter” key. All the components display can be restored
by clear the text box and click the “Enter” key.

When you click the little eye tool “ ” except the top one, it will change to “ ” and hide

the corresponding component in the window. When you click it again, it will change to “ ” and
make the corresponding component show in the window. The top little eye tool ” will control
all components hide or shown by clicking it.

417 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Hide or show all

components

Hide or show the

corresponding component

When you click the right tool “ ”, it will change to “ ” and lock the corresponding

component in the window. When you click it again, it will change to “ ” and unlock the

corresponding component. The top tool “ ” will control all components locked or unlocked by
clicking it. The component will not move if it is locked.

Lock or unlock all

components

Lock or unlock the

corresponding component

You can right-click to pop up the shortcut menu and cut, copy, paste or delete the selected
components. You can look at the components properties by this way.

418 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
5.4 Macro

5.4.1 Macro Editor Introduction

The Macro Editor can be opened by clicking “Create Macro” or “Edit Macro” from the
“Macro” menu. It is shown as below.

5.4.1.1 Shortcut Tools Bar

Shortcut Tools Bar contains Create Macro, Save, Save All, Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo,
Redo, Add New Address, Compiling and Help buttons.

Create Macro: Create a new macro.

Save: Save the current macro.

Save All: Save all macros.

Cut, Copy, and Paste: Edit the selected macro codes.

Undo, Redo: Undo /Redo the edit of the selected macro codes.

Add New Address: Add a new address alias for the current macro.

Compiling: Compile the current macro.

Help: Open the help file.

419 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
5.4.1.2 Address Statement

Address Statement is used to create and manage the address aliases in the current
macro. The address statement window shows on the left of the macro editor. You can

hide or display it by using ”. You can switch to the macro code window by clicking
the bottom tab “Macro Code”.

5.4.1.3 Macro Code

420 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Macro Code window is used to create or manage the macros in the current project.
All macros in this project will be listed here. These macros can be edited, deleted, imported
and exported. You can simply double-click a macro's name to edit the codes of the macro.

5.4.1.4 Code Editor Window

Code Editor Window is a code editor which is compatible with C syntax. The
detailed macro codes are edited here. Code Editor Window is a multi-tab window. You
can open multiple macros and display one macro by clicking the corresponding tab. If a
macro code has been edited but not yet saved, it will display “*” in this macro tab. For
example, it will display “macro_1.c*” if the codes of this macro are edited and not saved.

5.4.1.5 Input assistant Window

Input assistant Window on the right of the macro editor lists the built-in functions. It
will display a detailed description of the function in the Input assistant Window at the
lower middle position of the macro editor when you select a built-in function on the right
window.

421 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The Input assistant Window at the lower middle position of the macro editor gives
the use direction. And you can set the parameters of this function here, too. The function
with the parameters you have set will display in the Code Preview edit box. It will be
inserted into the current cursor position when you click the “Insert” button.

5.4.1.6 Find and Replace

Find and Replace function can provide a more convenient method of editing the
macro codes. It can perform jump between lines and you can view the macro reference
here.

5.4.1.7 Information List

Information List window displays prompts and error messages when the macro
compile. You can double-click the error message entry in the list if compiling errors
occur. It will quickly navigate to the position where this error occurs.

422 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
5.4.2 A Macro example
In this example, we use a macro to execute a simple calculation function. The output value
(saved in LW1) will be 3 times as much as the input value (saved in LW0) if the output value is less
than or equal to 300, or it will be 2 times as much as the input value.

5.4.2.1 Create a new project

Refer to: Detailed manual/File/Create New Project.

Build a new project.

5.4.2.2 Add the components

①Add a numeric value input component.

Refer to: Detailed manual/Component/Numeric Value and Character

Display/Numeric Value Input.

Add a numeric value input component in the window and set the address as LW0.

②Add a value display component.

423 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Refer to: Detailed manual/Component/Numeric Value and Character
Display/Numeric Value Display.

Add a numeric value display component in the window, and set the address as LW1.

③Add the text description.

Refer to: Detailed manual/Drawing/Static Text.

Add text description for the two numeric value components, as shown as below.

5.4.2.3 Create and edit a macro

①Create a new macro.

Refer to: Detailed manual/Macro/CreateMacro.

424 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Create a new macro, named "Computing".
②Add an address statement.

Add an address statement. Define the LW starting addressLW0 as LW_Start_Addr.

③Edit the macro codes.

In the macro code editor window, edit the macro codes according to the logic
previously defined. The syntax rules follow the C language specification. The final macro
codes are as follows.

425 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

④Compile and save.

Click the Compile button ” on the shortcut toolbar to compile after finish
editing the macro codes. A message box will pop up to display “Compile Successfully” if
no syntax errors; otherwise the message box will display “Compile Failure”.

426 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
If compiling fails, you should modify the macro codes according to the error
messages of the information list until compiling is successful.

Click the Save button " on the shortcut toolbar to save the macro codes. Then
close the macro window.

5.4.2.4 Execute the macro

There are many ways to execute the macro. You can set macros for the buttons, the
notification settings in the component control settings and timer function.

427 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
In this example, execute the “Computing” macro when the input value changes by
using the timer function. See settings as shown as below. The detailed using method of
the timer component, please refer to: Detailed manual/Component/Timer and Data
Transmission/Timer.

5.4.2.5 Offline Simulation

Offline simulation can be executed to verify the correction of the function after the
above steps are finished.

Click the "Offline Simulation" ” on the shortcut tools bar.

428 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

A “Clear Records” message box will pop up. After clicking the button “OK”, the
project will compile.

The project compiling needs a little time. There is a progress bar to indicate the
compiling progress. The simulator window (Emulator)will open automatically after the
compiling is finished.

429 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Input the value 100 to LW0.The output value of LW1 will be 300 according to the
rules that the output value will be 3 times as much as the input value if the input value is
less than or equal to 300.

Input the value 400 to LW0.The output value of LW1 will be 800 according to the
rules that the output value will be 2 times as much as the input value if the input value is
not less than or equal to 300.

5.5 Online software upgrade

If the user can not receive the automatic update reminders, the following solutions
are given.

(1) Execute “cmd” in the administrator mode. Please input the following commands.

rmdir /s /q “%userprofile%\wc”

rmdir /s /q “%appdata%\wyUpdate AU”

430 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
(2) Reopen the LT Studio software.

6 Appendix

6.1 The Use of Register

The Type of HMI register includes "Word" register and "bit register".

6.1.1 Word Register

LW: An internal "Word Register" in HMI. The data is lost when the power is off. The
register address range is 0 - 799,999.

RW: An internal "Word Register" in HMI. The data can be saved if power is off.
The register address range is 0 - 524288.

SRW: A special internal "Word Register" in HMI. The register address range is 0 -
11023. You can click the "System Register" button and open the "System Special
Function Register" to get the specific function of each SRW register when you use the
component such as “Numeric Display”. For example, SRW0 ~ 7 saves the system time.
The “Description” introduces the function of the selected register.

431 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

6.1.2 Bit Register

LB: An internal "Bit Register" in HMI. The data is lost when the power is off. The
register address is 0 - 799,999.

SRB: A special internal "Bit Register" in HMI. The register address range is 0 -
11023. You can click the "System register" button and open the "System Special
Function Register" to get the specific function of each SRB register when you use the
component such as “Bit Set”. The “Description” introduces the function of the selected
register. For example, SRB16 is ON when the touch screen is pressed.

432 / 488
LT Studio User Manual

Note: "Word Register" and "Bit register" in HMI are two different areas, so the
address does not overlap. For example, LW0 and LB0 are two registers that they are not
related. SRW0 and SRB0 are also two different special system registers. But each word
register can be divided into 16bit registers. For example, LW0 can be divided into 16bit
registers: LW0.0 ~ 0.15.

6.2 Built-in Functions

You can find the built-in functions when you create or edit Micros. They can be used
by calling directly.

6.2.1 Read Write Function

6.2.1.1 Read Bit Register: GetBit

boolGetBit( @Address Alias@,Address Offset ):

433 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Read one bit from designated register address.

@Address Alias@: Select a bit address register

Address Offset: An unsigned integer, Read Address=The address specified by @Address

Alias@+Address Offset

Return Value: BOOL, the value of the bit which was read

Error Information:

Get the error code using GetError() function.

int error=GetError();

Example:

bool power=GetBit( @power_on@,2 ):

In this example, power on is the alias of LB0, so the function GetBit will read the bit value
from LB2 and return to a BOOL variable power.

6.2.1.2 Read Word Register: GetWord

unsigned short GetWord( @Address Alias@, Address Offset ):

Read one word from specified register address.

@Address Alias@：Select a word address register

Address Offset: An unsigned integer, Read Address=The address specified by @Address

Alias@+Address Offset

Return Value：Unsigned Short Type, the value of the word which was read

Error Infomation: Get the error code using GetError() function.

int error=GetError();

Example：

unsigned short speed=GetWord( @Speed@,3 ):

434 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The Alias @Speed@ represents the register LW0 in this example, so the target word register
is LW3 (LW0+3), the value of LW3 is returned to an Unsigned Short variable named "speed".

short speed = (short) GetWord(@Speed@,3): //If use signed number, you can use force
conversion.

6.2.1.3 Read Double Word Register: GetDWord

Unsignedint GetDWord( @Address Alias@, Address Offset ):

Read a double word from a specified register address.

@Address Alias@：Select an address register (word or double word).

Address Offset: An unsigned integer, Read Address=The address specified by @Address

Alias@+Address Offset.

Return Value：unsignedint type, the value of the double word which was read. If the address
is word type, the function will return two consecutive words.

Error Information: Get the error code using GetError() function.

int error=GetError();

Example：

unsignedint speed=GetDWord( @Speed@,3 ):

The Alias @Speed@ represents the register LW0 in this example, so the target word register
is LW3 and LW4, the value of LW3 and LW4 are returned to a Unsigned int variable named "speed".

int speed = (int) GetDWord(@Speed@,3): //If use signed number, you can use force
conversion.

6.2.1.4 Read Float Register: GetFloat

floatGetFloat( @Address Alias@,Address Offset ):

Read a single precision float number from specified register address.

@Address Alias@：Select a address register (word or double word)

435 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Address Offset: An unsigned integer, Read Address=The address specified by @Address
Alias@+Address Offset

Return Value：float type, the value of the float number stored in the Word register or two
consecutive word registers which are read.

Error Information: Get the error code using GetError() function.

int error=GetError();

Example：

float speed=GetFloat(@Speed@,3):

The Alias @Speed@ represents the register LW0 in this example, so the target word register
is LW3 and LW4, the double word stored in LW3 and LW4 are returned to a float variable named
"speed".

6.2.1.5 Read Consecutive Registers: GetMem

intGetMem( Array Pointer,@AddressAlias@,AddressOffset,Byte Number ):

Read consecutive words from specified registers.

Array Pointer: pointer type, point to a pre-defined array.

@Address Alias@: select a register as the beginning address, could be a bit type or word type
register.

Address Offset: an unsigned int number. The read beginning address=The address specified
by @Address Alias@ + Address Offset.

Number of Bytes: an unsigned int number, specifying how many bytes should be read. Please
note: Number of Bytes = sizeof (Type of the Array) * (number of elements in the array). The upper
limit of Number of Bytes is 20480.

Return Value: int type, 0-Failure, 1-Success.

Example:

unsigned short data[10];

int error = GetMem(data,@Array Data@,2,10*sizeof(unsigned short）):

436 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
In this example, @Array Data@ = LW0, so the function will return 10 words from the address
starting from LW2.

char data[5];

int error = GetMem(data,@Array Data@,2,5):

@Array Data@ = LW0, so the function will read 3 words (each word contains 2 variables of
char type, the higher half of the last word is invalid) and copy to the array named "data"

6.2.1.6 Set Bit Register: SetBit

intSetBit( @Address Alias@,AddressOffset,Set Value ):

Write a bool value into one bit of a designated register address.

@Address Alias@: Select a bit address register

Address Offset: An unsigned integer, Target Address=The address specified by @Address

Alias@+Address Offset.

Set Value: BOOL, the value to be written into the designated bit register, 0 or 1.

Return Value: int type, 0-Failure, 1-Success.

Example:

int error=SetBit(@power@,2,1)

In this example, power is the alias of LB0, so the function SetBit will write “1” into the bit
LB2.

6.2.1.7 Set Word Register: SetWord

intSetWord( @Address Alias@,AddressOffset,Set Value ):

Write one 16-bit number into a designated word register.

@Address Alias@: Select a word type address.

Address Offset: unsigned int, Target Address=The address represented by @Address

Alias@+Offset.

Set Value: short type, the value to be written into the designated register.

Return Value: int type, 0-Failure, 1-Success.

437 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Example:

short speed;

int error=SetWord(@Speed@,3,speed);

In this example, the alias @Speed@ refers to LW0, so the function will write the value of
speed into the word register LW3 .

6.2.1.8 Set Double Word Register: SetDWord

boolSetDWord( @Address Alias@,AddressOffset,Set Value ):

Write one 32-bit number into a designated word register, the register could be a Dword
register or two consecutive word registers.

@Address Alias@: Select a word or dword type address.

Address Offset: unsigned int, Target Address=The address represented by @Address

Alias@+Offset.

Set Value: int type, the value to be written into the designated register.

Return Value: int type, 0-Failure, 1-Success.

Example:

unsignedint speed;

int error=SetDWord(@Speed@,3,speed):

In this example, the alias @Speed@ refers to LW0, so the function will write the value of
speed into the word registers LW3 and LW4.

6.2.1.9 Set Float Register: SetFloat

intSetFloat( @Address Alias@,AddressOffset,Set Value ):

Write one single precision float number into a designated word register.

@Address Alias@: Select a word or dword type address.

Address Offset: unsigned int, Target Address=The address represented by @Address

Alias@+Offset.

Set Value: float type, the float value to be written into the designated register.

438 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Return Value: int type, 0-Failure, 1-Success.

Example:

float speed=3.14;

int error=SetFloat(@Speed@,3,speed):

In this example, the alias @Speed@ refers to LW0, so the function will write the value of
speed into the dword registers consist of LW3 and LW4.

6.2.1.10 Set Consecutive Registers: SetMem

intSetMem( Array Pointer,@AddressAlias@,AddressOffset,Byte Number ):

Write the array data into consecutive registers.

Array Pointer: pointer type, point to a pre-defined array.

@Address Alias@: A register as the beginning address. It can be a bit type or word type
register.

Address Offset: an unsigned int number. The read beginning address=The address specified
by @Address Alias@ + Address Offset.

Number of Bytes: an unsigned int number, specifying how many bytes should be read.
Please note: Number of Bytes = sizeof (Type of the Array) * (number of elements in the array).
The upper limit of Number of Bytes is 20480.

Return Value: int type, 0-Failure, 1-Success.

Example:

unsigned short data[10];

int error = SetMem(data,@Array Data@,2,10*sizeof(unsigned short)):

In this example, @Array Data@ = LW0, so the function will copy 10 words to the 10 word
register address starting from LW2.

char data[5];

int error = SetMem(data,@Array Data@,2,5):

439 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
@Array Data@ = LW0, so the function will copy the value from the array named "data" to 3
words starting from LW2(each word contains 2 variables of char type, the higher half of the last
word is invalid)

6.2.2 System Functions

6.2.2.1 Call Macro: CallMacro

intCallMacro( "Macro Name" ):

Call Designated Macro.

Macro Name: The content within the double quotes is the name of the macro being called,
don't use any file name suffix.

Return Value: int type, the return value of the main function of the macro will be returned.

Example:

int error = CallMacro("Macro_1");

6.2.2.2 Get Error Code: GetError

intGetError( ):

Get error code.

No input parameters.

Return Value: int type, the corresponding error code.

0-Not executed

1-Success

2-Timeout

3-Error

4- Socket word error

5- Communication failure

Example:

440 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
int error =GetError();

6.2.2.3 Delay Function: Delay

Delay(ms):

Delay Function, the input parameter is the number of mili-seconds, unsigned int type.

Return Value: None.

Example:

Delay(1000)://Delay 1000ms.

6.2.2.4 Set Com Parameters: SetComParam

intSetComParam( Port Number,BaudRate,databit,stopbit,checkbit,communication mode);

Port Number: the ID of com port, unsigned int type. 0-COM1, 1-COM2, 2-COM3...

Baud Rate: the speed of communication, int type. e.g. 9600, 115200

Date bit: the number of bits used as data, int type, 7,8

Stop bit: the stop bit, int type, 1,2

Check bit: specify the way of checking, int type, 'n' or 110-no check, 'o' or 111-odd check, 'e'
or 101-even check

Communication mode: set the mode of communication, int type, 0-232, 1-485-4w, 2-485-
2w.

Return Value: 0-Failed, 1-Success.

Example：

int error=SetComParam(0,115200,8,1,'n',2);//COM1,485-2w, 115200,8,1,N.

6.2.2.5 Com Data Output: Outport

intOutport( Port ID,BufferPointer,Data Quantity);

Please call the SetComParam function to initialize the serial port before call this function.

Port ID:the ID of com port, unsigned int type. 0-COM1, 1-COM2, 2-COM3...

441 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Buffer Pointer: the pointer to the buffer array.

Data Quantity: unsigned short, the number of data to be sent out.

Return Value: the number of bytes of the output data.

Example：

unsigned char send_buff[]="Hello world!";

int error=Outport(1,send_buff,12);

6.2.2.6 Com Data Import: Inport

intInport( Port ID,BufferPointer,BufferSize,Timeout Limit):

Please call the SetComParam function to initialize the serial port before call this function.

Port ID:the ID of com port, unsigned int type. 0-COM1, 1-COM2, 2-COM3...

Buffer Pointer: the pointer to the buffer array

Buffer Size: The length of buffer being read, the size will be returned when read complete,
maximum buffer size is 4096.

Timeout Limit: unit mS, if no data is received within nmS, or buffer is full, the receive
function will return.

Return Value: the number of data actually be read, return value of -1 indicates error.

Example:

unsigned char recv_buff[];

intdata_count=Inport(1,recv_buff,16,10);

6.2.2.7 SQL Database Access Command: SqlCmd

intSqlCmd(Database file ID, SQL command string pointer);

Database file ID: int type, 0 represents the database for historical and alarm events;
1,2,3...represent the database file corresponding to the data sampling IDs.

SQL command string pointer: char type, pointer to the SQL command strings.

442 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Return Value: int type, 1-Success, 0-Failed.

6.2.2.8 SQL Database Select: SqlSelect

intSqlSelect(Database file ID, SQL command string pointer, Buffer of inquiry results,
Number of Rows Returned, Number of Columns Returned);

Database file ID: int type, 0 represents the database for historical and alarm events;
1,2,3...represent the database file corresponding to the data sampling IDs.

SQL command string pointer: char type, pointer to the SQL command strings.

Buffer of inquiry results: char type, pointer.

Number of Rows Returned: int type, the number of rows of the returned results.

Number of Columns Returned: int type, the number of columns of the returned results.

Return Value: int type, 1-Success, 0-Failed.

Example:

char **pResult;

intRow,Col;

int err=SqlSelect(2,"xxx",pResult,Row,Col);

SqlFree(pResult);

6.2.2.9 SQL Data Buffer Free: SqlFree

intSqlFree(Pointer to Database inquiry buffer);

Pointer to database inquiry buffer: Char Array pointer.

Return Value: int type, 1-Success, 0-Failure.

Example:

char **pResult;

intRow,Col;

int err=SqlSelect(2,"xxx",pResult,Row,Col);

SqlFree(pResult);

443 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
6.2.2.10 Debug Function: Debug

void Debug( Port ID,Format String,Var1,Var2...);

Please call the SetComParam function to initialize the serial port before call this function.
But serial port initialization is not needed if only debug in the simulation window.

Port ID: the ID of com port, unsigned int type. 0-COM1, 1-COM2, 2-COM3...

Format String: the format of output string, usage is same as printf in C language.

Variables: the name of variables corresponding to the output strings, same usage as printf
function in C programming language.

The format is defined below, [] indicates optional elements.

%[Designated Parameter][Identifier][Width][.Precision]Designator

If you want to output '%', please use '%%'. 1- Define the direction of processing. Negative
sign means the direction is from backend to the beginning.2- The word element for space filling.
0 means fill 0s to the spaces.3- The width of the character.4- Precision, the number of decimal
places.

Character Conversion:

%% Print % sign, no conversion

%c Convert the integer to corresponding ASCII character

%d Convert the integer to decimal number

%f Convert to floating number

%o Convert the integer to Octal numbers

%s Convert the integer to string

%x Convert the integer to lower case hexadecimal number

%X Convert the integer to upper case hexadecimal number

Example：

intitest=12;

floatftest=65.4321;

444 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Debug(0,"itest=%d\n ftest=%2.3f\n",itest,ftest);

Output Result：

itest=12

ftest=65.432

6.2.3 Computation and Conversion Function

6.2.3.1 CRC check function, 16Bit

unsigned short CRC16( Array Pointer，Computation Length );

Array Pointer: point to the array being processed.

Computation Length: the number of bytes being processed.

Return Value: 16-bit CRC check value.

Example：

unsigned char data[]={5,6,3,2,18};

unsigned short crc16=CRC16(data,5);

6.2.4 Operator

6.2.4.1 Assignment Operator

Assignment operator for assignment.

Example：

inti;

i=100;

445 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
6.3 System Register Bits and Words List

Network connection status

SRB0 SRB0=0: no connection.

SRB0=1: network connection is normal

SRB1=1: Reset IP address immediately/re-obtain dynamic IP

SRB1
address immediately

SRB3 SRB3=1: Reboot the system

SRB4 SRB4=1: reboot and enter BOOT state (refresh state)

SRB5=0: light up the backlight, SRB5=1: turn off the

SRB5
backlight

SRB6=0: No SD card inserted,

SRB6
SRB6=1: SD card inserted

SRB7~9=0: no USB flash drive inserted, SRB7~9=1: USB flash

SRB7 drive inserted, SRB7~9 correspond to USB 1~3 inserted USB

flash drives respectively

SRB10=0: Function key input lowercase characters, SRB10=1

SRB10
function key input corresponding uppercase characters

SRB11=0: USB download cable is not connected, SRB11=1:

SRB11
USB download cable is connected

SRB12=1: mouse use allowed

SRB12
SRB12=0: mouse disabled

446 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRB13=0: alphabetic keyboard displays letters, SRB13=1
SRB13
alphabetic keyboard displays numbers and symbols

SRB14 SRB14=0: use English input, SRB14=1: use Pinyin input

SRB15 SRB15=1: force disable alarm beeping

When the touch is pressed, SRB16 turns ON and the X and Y

SRB16 coordinates of the touch position are displayed in SRW450

and SRW451.

When SRB17 is ON, RW, recipe and other power-down hold

data is written immediately. The default is OFF, when

SRB17
buffered writing is used, so if power is suddenly lost, the last

few seconds to a minute of data will be lost.

If SRB18 is set to 1, the system will safely eject the SD card,

to reuse the SD card, please re-plug the SD card or reboot

SRB18
the HMI, you can use SRB6 to check if the SD card has been

ejected.

SRB19 Use SRB7 to check if the USB stick has been ejected.

After changing the COM1 communication setting, setting

SRB20 this position 1 will immediately apply the change. If this

position is not set, it will only take effect after a reboot.

After changing the COM2 communication mode setting, the

SRB21
change will be applied immediately to position 1. If this

447 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
position is not set, the change will only take effect after a

restart.

After changing the COM3 communication mode setting, the

SRB22 change will be applied immediately to position 1. If this bit is

not set, the change will only take effect after a restart.

After changing the COM4 communication mode setting, the

change will be applied immediately to position 1. If this

SRB23
position is not set, the change will only take effect after a

restart.

SRB30 SRB30=1: User rights login

SRB31 SRB31=1: Logout of user rights

SRB32 SRB32=1: Add user rights

SRB33 SRB33=1: Delete user rights

SRB34 SRB34=1: Change the password of the current user rights

SRB35=1: revert to user information of the configuration

SRB35
project

Changes to box input IO point X0 will be reflected to this

SRB50
value

Changes to the box input IO point X1 will be reflected to this

SRB51
value

448 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Changing the value of register SRB52 will change the output
SRB52
state of the box Y0 point

Changing the value of register SRB53 will change the output

SRB53
state of the box at point Y1

SRB70 SRB70=1:Acknowledge all current alarm events

SRB71 SRB71=1:Acknowledge all historical alarm events

SRB72 SRB72=1:Clear the acknowledged current events

SRB73 SRB73=1: Clear restored historical events

SRB101=1: Execute the display sub-macro for all

SRB101
components

SRB102=1: Customized uppercase characters for Korean

SRB102
input method

SRB103 SRB103=1: File browse path set by SRW300 takes effect

SRB104 SRB104=1: Disable scrolling input function for text elements

SRB105 SRB105=1: No history is saved for 33~64 group alarms

SRB106 SRB106=1: Trend graph hides out-of-range sampling points

Confirm rebind when rebooting the device (valid only after

SRB110 reboot if current flink serial number and bound serial

number do not match and first trigger)

SRB111 SRB111=1, rebind flink successful

449 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRB112=1, power on detects that the current flink and the
SRB112
bound flink serial number do not match

Already bound HMI, when no flink flag bit is connected 1: no

SRB113
flink inserted 0: flink inserted

SRB114 Internal use

Synchronized with the "Connected flink" field of the

SRB115 configuration project, =1 means used, =0 means not used,

read only.

Network connection status of Ethernet 2 SRB120=0: no

SRB120
connection; SRB120=1: network connection normal

SRB121=1: Immediately reset the IP address of Ethernet 2 /

SRB121
immediately reacquire the dynamic IP address

SRB122 WiFi immediately re-writes configuration and reconnects

SRB123 WiFi connection status triggers a refresh

SRB124 Start WiFi network scan

SRB125 Cellular network status triggers refresh

SRB126=1: immediately resets all network parameters back

SRB126 to the same as the in-project settings (obtained from

fshmi.bin)

SRB127 Triggers saving of internet access, and url

SRB128 Triggers saving of apn etc.

450 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
currently running project allows upload flag, read-only,
SRB140
SRB140=1: upload allowed; SRB140=0: upload not allowed

Current running project allows decompile flag, read-only,

SRB141 SRB141=1: decompile allowed; SRB141=0: decompile not

allowed.

Current running project has set download password flag,

SRB142 read-only, SRB142=1: download password set; SRB142=0: no

download password set.

Current running project has set the developer password flag,

SRB143 read-only, SRB143=1: developer password set; SRB143=0:

developer password not set.

System recovery, restores the HMI to the state of waiting for

the configuration project to be downloaded, write-only.

SRB144
SRB144 = 1: performs system recovery; SRB144 = 0: no

action.

System bit register, SRB147 to 1, triggers start of fshmi.logo

file update and logo replacement; by trigger success floader

SRB147 to 0.

Check if the replacement is successful, using SRW70, out of

error prompt.

SRB150: control the user rights username and password byte

SRB150
allocation method.

451 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRB150=0, SRW400 starts with 16 words for username and

SRW416 starts with 4 words for password.

SRB150=1, SRW400 starts with 12 words for the user name

and SRW412 starts with 8 words for the password.

Power-down holding register, SRB10000=0: automatically

SRB10000 obtain IP address (DHCP); SRB10000=1: statically assign IP

address

SRB10010 SRB10010=0: buzzer enable, SRB10010=1: buzzer disabled

SRB10011 SRB10011=0: play sound normally, SRB10011=1: mute

SRB10012=0: enable five-finger screen grab to return to

SRB10012 main window blinking, SRB10012=1: disable five-finger

screen grab to return to main window

SRB10013=0: Allow modification of system time

SRB10013
SRB10013=1: Disable modification of system time

SRB10014=1: keyboard focus left/right movement by pixel

SRB10014 SRB10014=0: Keyboard focus left/right movement by

component addition order

SRB10015=1: disable turning off the backlight or turning

SRB10015
down the brightness when the alarm is not restored

SRB10016=1: Enable keyboard arrow keys to control mouse

SRB10016
movement and enter key to control left click

452 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRB10020=0: disable VNC, SRB10020=1: enable VNC;

SRB10020 SRB10020=0: disable VNC

SRB10020=1: VNC enabled; power down save

SRB10021=0: Remote VNC can control interface;

SRB10021 SRB10021=1: Remote VNC is display only, no control; power

down save

Read/write, power-down hold register, SRB10022=0:

SRB10022 automatically obtain IP address (DHCP); SRB10022=1:

statically assigned IP address (Ethernet 2)

Disable register power-up initialisation: when set to 1,

SRB10030 power-up does not immediately initialise all register values.

Valid for the case of variable station numbers.

SRB10031=1 : loading string is not displayed at boot,

SRB10031
SRB10031=0 : loading string is displayed at boot

Used by the template as a control bit to pop up the program

SRB10032 update window. SRB10032=1 : pop up, SRB10031=0 : no

action

SRW0 System date: year in the format 20xx

SRW1 System date: month

SRW2 System date: day

SRW3 System time: hour

453 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW4 System time: minutes

SRW5 System time: seconds

SRW6 System time: milliseconds

SRW7 System date: day of week

HMI MAC address, SRW10~15, the lower address of each

SRW10
WORD indicates a MAC segment. Read only, not rewritable.

Product model ID, SRW20~21, ID number of the product

SRW20
model

Factory date, SRW24~26, the date the product was shipped

SRW24
from the factory, corresponding in order: year: month: day

HMI current color depth, 16-16 bit color, 24-24 bit color,
SRW27
read only

Software version number, SRW30~36, in order: Boot, Kernel,

SRW30
Rootfs, Floader, Fgui, Fcs, Fds

Product hardware serial numbers, SRW40~45, 96 digits in

SRW40
total, unique worldwide

Used for operation confirmation in security settings: 1 -

SRW50
Confirm operation execution, 2 - Cancel operation

Communication message code, communication timeout,

SRW60
error, etc., occupies one word register

SRW61 Device number of the communication message

454 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW62 Port number where the communication message is located

The PLC station number where the communication message

SRW63
is located

Set the communication timeout or error pop-up time in

SRW64
seconds (0 means default 3 seconds)

Set the time to hold the system prompt pop-up in seconds

SRW65
(0 means default 3 seconds)

System information codes.

1: Input overrun.

2: processing in progress.

3: operation successful.

4: data transfer out of bounds.

5: Out of memory.

6: macro execution error.

SRW70
7: password input error.

8: failed to connect to the server.

9: operation failure.

10: current user rights do not match.

11: successful logout.

12: user repeatedly logged in.

13: SD card not detected.

455 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
14: U-drive 1 not detected.

15: U-disk 2 not detected.

16: database upgrade in progress, please wait.

17: query in progress, please wait.

18: Printing failed.

19: Printing busy.

20: preparing report for printing.

24: HMI remaining space is less than 3M.

25: SD card with less than 3M remaining space.

26: USB1 remaining space less than 3M.

27: insufficient space left for USB2 of 3M.

30: Media file format error.

31: media file playback failure.

32: password setting too short.

33: media playback not supported by 16-bit color.

34: unsupported video encoding format.

35: capacitive touch does not need to be calibrated (only

Allwinner platforms will give this indication).

128: operation successful.

137: file does not exist.

138: wrong file type.

456 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
139: operation failed.

140: file already exists.

141: user password error.

142: Insufficient memory on screen.

143: insufficient memory on SD card, USB stick.

144: Incorrect developer password.

145: target model restricted, please change to the correct

HMI.

146: current HMI model does not support this function.

147: upgrade file not detected.

148: abnormal upgrade file.

149: the upgrade file version is the same as the current

version.

150: Upgrade in progress, please wait...

151: Kernel upgrade failed.

152: kernel upgrade successful.

SRW76~77: Double-word type, showing the maximum space

SRW76
(in bytes) of the HMI disk

SRW78~79: double word type, displaying the used space of

SRW78
HMI disk (in bytes)

457 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW80~81: Double-word type, displaying the amount of
SRW80
RAM memory currently occupied by the system

SRW84~85: Double-word type, displaying the upper limit of

SRW84
the amount of RAM memory available to the system

Display the time interval (in milliseconds) of the system cyclic

SRW88
scan

SRW96 SRW96~99: 4 words, developer password

Enter the user registration password for verification.

SRW100 Occupies SRW100~103, 4 words, please use the text input

element to read or display the password value

Read-only register, display the current password level of the

SRW104
basic window. SRW104, occupies 1 word

Forced change of the current password level, note that it can

SRW105 only be switched from a high level to a low level. SRW105,

occupies 1 word

SRW120~135; COM1 connected device communication

status by station number, occupies 16 words, each word has

SRW120 16 bits, corresponding to station number 0~255. e.g.

SRW120 with Bit3 of 1 means that the serial port is

connected to station number 3 device communication error.

458 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW140~155;COM2 connected device communication status

by station number, occupies 16 words, each word has 16

SRW140 bits, corresponding to station number 0~255. e.g. SRW140

with Bit3 of 1 means the serial port connected device of

station number 3 has communication error.

SRW160~175;COM3 connected device communication status

by station number, occupies 16 words, each word has 16

SRW160 bits, corresponding to station number 0~255. e.g. SRW160

with Bit3 of 1 means the serial port is connected to station

number 3 device communication error.

SRW180~195; COM4 connected device communication

status by station number, occupying 16 words, each word 16

SRW180 bits, corresponding to station number 0~255. e.g. SRW180

with Bit3 of 1 means the serial port connected device

communication error of station number 3.

SRW200~215, 16 words in total, are generally used as

SRW200 character display elements to display the input process of

characters when the keyboard is popped up

SRW220~235, 16 characters in total, generally used as a

SRW220 character display element to show the maximum value of the

input range of the current value input element

459 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW240~255, 16 characters in total, generally used as a

SRW240 character display element to show the minimum value of the

input range of the current numeric input element

SRW260 to 275, 16 characters in total, generally used as a

SRW260 character display element to show the historical value of the

current numeric input before it enters the input state

Input keyboard control word, currently only SRW280.0 is

valid, SRW280.0 is ON means that the alternative word

SRW280 window coordinates (SRW281,SRW282) are in effect

SRW280.0 is OFF to indicate that the alternative word

window coordinates are fixed at the page coordinates (0,0).

Single character, input method alternative window x-

SRW281
coordinate, relative to keyboard window

Single character, Y-coordinate of input method alternative

SRW282
window, relative to keyboard window

Input method type, 0 - Pinyin input method, 1 - Korean input

SRW283
method

SRW300~349, total 50 characters, general use character

SRW300 component, displaying the absolute path string currently

selected by the file browser component

460 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW350~389, 40 characters, general character element,

SRW350 displays or enters the file name of the file browser element,

excluding the path

SRW390, actions performed after confirmation of the

document viewing element.

0-cancel or no operation.

1-Import of the project to the HMI.

SRW390
2-Export from HMI to SD card or USB stick.

3-Importing recipes to the HMI.

4-Export of recipes to SD card or USB stick.

5-Other file operations

Clean-up operations done before importing the project to

the HMI.

BIT0: Clears the RW,

SRW391
BIT1: Clears the recipe

BIT2: Clears data sampling records and alarm event history

BIT3: Clears special register values

Result of the import and export operation.

128: Operation successful 0x80

SRW392
137: File does not exist 0x89

138: File type error 0x8a

461 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
139: Operation failed 0x8b

140: File already exists 0x8c

141: User password error 0x8d

142: Insufficient HMI memory space 0x8e

143: External memory storage space is insufficient 0x8f,

132: U disk format is not correct, please replace the U disk

with Fat format 0x84

144: Developer password error 0x90

145: Screen does not match the model selected by the

project 0X91

The user uploads a password store that takes up 4

characters, the password can be any combination of 0 to 9

and supports a maximum of 8 numbers. Note that for

SRW394
example 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupies

SRW394~397, 4 words in total, please use ASCII components

to read or display the password value

SRW398 Minimum length of user password

SRW399 User number for user rights login

User permission user name string, occupies 16 characters,

SRW400 you can enter 16 Chinese characters or 32 English and

numeric characters

462 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Password for user rights setting, occupies 4 characters,

password can be any combination from 0 to 9, maximum

SRW416 support 8 numbers. Note that for example, 0123 and 00123

are different passwords. Use ASCII input, please use the text

input element to operate

Double word, shows the current user rights, each bit

SRW420 corresponds to a BIT, BIT0 corresponds to permission 1, BIT1

corresponds to permission 2...

Double word to set the new user rights, each bit corresponds

SRW422 to a BIT, BIT0 corresponds to right 1, BIT1 corresponds to

right 2...

Set the automatic logout time for new users (in minutes), 2
SRW424
words

Set the new password for the new user or the new password

for the modified password, accounting for 4 characters, the

password can be any combination from 0 to 9, the maximum

SRW426
number of numbers supported is 8. Note that for example,

0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Use ASCII input,

please use the text input element to operate

Set the confirmation password for adding a new user or

SRW430
changing a password, accounting for 4 characters

SRW434 Display of the currently logged in user name, 16 characters

463 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Delay time for issuing a super read after numeric entry or

SRW449 clicking a switch, time value = set value * 100 ms. Default

value 0 for 100 ms.

SRW450: When the touch is pressed, SRB16 is set to ON and

SRW450
SRW450 is the X coordinate value of the current touch point

SRW451: When the touch is pressed, SRB16 is set to ON and

SRW451
SRW451 is the Y-coordinate value of the current touch point

The key code value of the current key press, occupies 2

SRW456
words

Set the determination time of USB keyboard key release,

SRW458 time value = set value * 200 ms. SRW458 default value 0,

means 200 ms.

The serial number of the box/screen, accounting for 12

SRW460
characters, 6 characters in total

SRW466 Box/screen password, 4 characters, 2 words

System prompt masking bit, 16 characters in total. SRW480.x

is the ON masking SRW70=x corresponding to the prompt.

SRW480 For example: SRW480.1 shield input over limit, SRW480.F

shield not detected U disk 2, SRW481.0 shield database

upgrade in progress.

464 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Communication prompt masking bits (SRW496.1 is ON to

SRW496 mask communication timeout prompts, SRW496.2 to mask

communication error prompts)

SRW630~633; Network PLC communication status bits, 4

single words indicate the status of up to 63 remote PLCs, a

bit value of 1 indicates that the corresponding remote PLC

communication is abnormal, a value of 0 indicates that the

corresponding remote PLC communication is normal or

SRW630 unused.

For example, a value of 1 for SRW630.1 indicates that the

first remote PLC is communicating abnormally, and a value

of 1 for SRW630.2 indicates that the second remote PLC is

communicating abnormally.

SRW640~655, network PLC communication status bits, set to

1 means the corresponding network PLC communication is

abnormal, set to 0 means the corresponding network PLC

communication is normal or not in use. For example,

SRW640

SRW640.0 is 1, which means the first network PLC

communication is abnormal, SRW640.1 is 1, which means the

second network PLC communication is abnormal.

465 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Display the length of the scan gun input characters (in

SRW699 bytes), the user needs to clear this length value after reading

the content of SRW700

SRW700~799:Display the content of the scan gun input

SRW700
characters

COM1 automatically blocked station number: SRW800~815;

occupies 16 words, each word has 16 bits, one bit

corresponds to one station number, indicating station

number 0~255. 1 - the corresponding station number has

been automatically blocked communication; 0 - the

SRW800 corresponding station number is normal communication.

Example: Bit 3 of SRW800 is 1, which means that the station

number 3 device connected to COM1 has been blocked

automatically due to abnormal communication. This register

is valid when SRW10230 is set to allow automatic blocking.

COM2 is automatically blocked station number:

SRW820~835; occupies 16 words, each word has 16 bits, one

bit corresponds to one station number, indicating station

SRW820
number 0~255. 1 - the corresponding station number has

been automatically blocked communication; 0 - the

corresponding station number is normal communication.

466 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Example: Bit 3 of SRW820 is 1, which means that the station

number 3 device connected to COM2 is blocked

automatically due to abnormal communication. This register

is valid when SRW10280 is set to allow automatic blocking.

COM3 is automatically blocked station number:

SRW840~855; occupies 16 words, each word has 16 bits, one

bit corresponds to one station number, indicating station

number 0~255. 1 - the corresponding station number has

been automatically blocked communication; 0 - the

SRW840 corresponding station number is normal communication.

Example: Bit 3 of SRW840 is 1, which means that the station

number 3 device connected to COM3 has an abnormal

communication and is automatically blocked. This register is

valid when SRW10330 is set to allow automatic blocking.

COM4 is automatically blocked station number:

SRW860~875; occupies 16 words, each word has 16 bits, one

bit corresponds to one station number, indicating station

SRW860
number 0~255. 1 - the corresponding station number has

been automatically blocked communication; 0 - the

corresponding station number is normal communication.

467 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Example: Bit 3 of SRW860 is 1, which means that the station

number 3 device connected to COM4 has been blocked

automatically due to abnormal communication. This register

is valid when SRW10380 is set to allow auto-masking.

Ethernet communication automatically blocked devices:

SRW880~895; occupies 16 words, each word has 16 bits, one

bit corresponds to one Ethernet device, indicating the 0th to

255th device in the network PLC setting, blocking

communication by IP to close the channel.

1 - the IP set for the corresponding device has been

SRW880
automatically blocked from communication; 0 - the

corresponding device is communicating normally.

Example: Bit3 of SRW880 is 1, which means that the 3rd

Ethernet device is communicating abnormally and the IP set

is automatically blocked. This register is valid when

SRW10518 is set to allow auto-masking.

HMI MAC2 address, assigned to Ethernet 2, SRW900~905,

SRW900 the lower address of each WORD indicates a MAC segment.

Read only, not rewritable.

SRW1020 Box online status, 1: box online, 0: box offline

SRW1021 Box network type, 1: Ethernet, 2: GPRS, 4: WIFI, 5: 4G

SRW1022 Box unlimited signal strength: 0 min, 8 max

468 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW1000~1001, double word (unit hundred milliseconds). 1

SRW1000 is accumulated every hundred milliseconds starting from

normal operation of GUI, zero is cleared for GUI reboot.

Display IoT MQTT function using driver version number,

occupies 1 word, segmented value display, takes value

SRW1070
0~65535. version explanation: V a.b.c, SRW1070 =

a*1000+b*100+c.

FS version number first field from left to right, read only,

SRW1080 occupies 1 word, decimal unsigned number taking values

from 0 to 15.

FS version number, second field from left to right, read-only,

SRW1081 occupies 1 word, decimal unsigned number in the range 0 to

15.

FS version number, third field from left to right, read-only,

SRW1082~1083 occupies 2 characters, decimal unsigned number in the

range 0 to 16777215.

Product model ID, SRW1090~1091, the ID number of the

SRW1090 product model. in ASCII string form. See SRW20 for numeric

form.

SRW1092~1093 Internal use

Displays the product hardware version number,

SRW1094
corresponding to the hardware version number area of the

469 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
EEPROM or eMMC memory, occupying 1 word. Numeric

form, takes values from 0 to 65535.

Error code for the address mapping function. 0 = normal, -1

= error registering entry to FDS, 2 = mapping device driver

SRW1161 communication timeout, 3 = mapping device driver

communication error, 6 = FDS error, occupies 1 word, read

only [modbus rtu sever and modbus tcp sever].

HMI IP address setting, power down hold, SRW10010~13,

SRW10010 each WORD represents an IP segment. Read/write when

static, read-only when dynamic.

HMI subnet mask setting, power down hold, SRW10014~17,

SRW10014 each WORD represents one IP segment, read/write in static,

read-only in dynamic.

HMI Gateway setting, power-down hold, SRW10018~21,

SRW10018 each WORD represents an IP segment, read/write at static,

read-only at dynamic.

DNS1 setting, power-down hold, SRW10022~25, each

SRW10022 WORD represents an IP segment, read/write at static time,

read-only at dynamic time.

DNS2 setting, power-down hold, alternate DNS,

SRW10026 SRW10026~29, each WORD represents an IP segment,

read/write at static, read-only at dynamic.

470 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
LAN IP address setting for local ETH, power-down hold,

SRW10030 SRW10030~33, each WORD represents an IP segment. Read

and write available when static.

Reset switch short pulse width setting, occupies 1 word,

takes the value 0~200, unit milliseconds, default value 0,

SRW10039
means 100 milliseconds. Effective around 5 seconds after

modification

Screen saver time, SRW10040, the product after a period of

SRW10040 time without operation, jump screen saver screen, power

down to save

Backlight off time, SRW10041, after a period of no operation,

SRW10041 the product automatically turns off the backlight, power off

is saved

Turn down the brightness time, SRW10042, after a period of

SRW10042 no operation, turn down the brightness, power down and

save

Modify the current language number, SRW10050, and save it

at power down.

SRW10050 0 means use language 1,

1 means that language 2 is used,

and so on

SRW10051 SRW10051, rotate display, power down save

471 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
0: normal

1: 90 degrees vertical

2: 270 degrees vertical

3: Inverted

Note: Adaptive adjustment is not possible, you need to

adjust the width and height of the window before rotating.

Set the current brightness percentage value 1~100,

SRW10052
SRW10052, power down save.

Set current volume percentage value 1~100, SRW10053,

SRW10053
power down save.

Time zone setting. Take the value 1~82, corresponding to

SRW10055 different time zones, other values (including 0) indicate East

8 (China), the default value is 0.

Enable/disable synchronization of time from NTP server.

SRW10056 = 1: synchronization allowed. = 2:

SRW10056
Synchronization is disabled. = other values (including 0): not

defined.

Configuration change flag. Occupies 1 word, 1 before

SRW10057 configuration download, after download, value is 2. Needs to

be cleared by user. [floader].

472 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
Set the maximum execution time of macro instruction, unit

hundred milliseconds, 0 - no limit, 1 - macro instruction

execution time (not including the communication time of

SRW10080
reading and writing registers) exceeds 100mS, forcibly

terminate the macro instruction. The default value is 10 i.e.

1S, power down and save.

Single character, font size setting for Pinyin input method,

SRW10082
12~32 numbers. Power down save

SRW10084 Keyboard arrow keys to move the mouse in steps, unit: pixels

User level 1 password, password can be any combination of

0~9, maximum support 8 numbers. Note that for example

SRW10110 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupies

SRW10110~113, 4 characters in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 2 password, password can be any combination of

0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for example

SRW10114 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupies

SRW10114~117, 4 words in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 3 password, password can be any combination of

SRW10118 0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for example

0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

473 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW10118~121, 4 words in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 4 password, password can be any combination of

0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for example

SRW10122 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

SRW10122~125, 4 characters in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 5 passwords, passwords can be any combination

of 0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for

SRW10126 example 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

SRW10126~129, 4 characters in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 6 password, password can be any combination of

0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for example

SRW10130 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

SRW10130~133, 4 characters in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 7 password, password can be any combination of

SRW10134 0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for example

0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

474 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW10134~137, 4 characters in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 8 passwords, passwords can be any combination

of 0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for

SRW10138 example 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

SRW10138~141, 4 words in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 9 passwords, passwords can be any combination

of 0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for

SRW10142 example 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

SRW10142~145, 4 characters in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 10 passwords, passwords can be any combination

of 0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for

SRW10146 example 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

SRW10146~149, 4 words in total, please use ASCII

component to read or display the password value

User level 11 password, password can be any combination

SRW10150 from 0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for

example 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

475 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW10150~153, 4 words in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 12 password, password can be any combination of

0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for example

SRW10154 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

SRW10154~157, 4 words in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 13 password, password can be any combination of

0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for example

SRW10158 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

SRW10158~161, 4 words in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 14 password, password can be any combination of

0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for example

SRW10162 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupy

SRW10162~165, 4 characters in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

User level 15 passwords, passwords can be any combination

SRW10166 of 0 to 9, maximum 8 digits supported. Note that for

example 0123 and 00123 are different passwords. Occupancy

476 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW10166~169, 4 characters in total, please use ASCII

components to read or display the password value

VNC control password, password verification has control

SRW10180 rights, can be controlled remotely. No password, set to

empty

VNC monitoring password, password verification with

SRW10184 monitoring rights, only monitoring, not control. No

password, set to empty

Occupies one word (16-bit unsigned number), used to set

SRW10199 the delay time between HMI start and start of external

communication, unit is second, take value 0~300.

SRW10200~201;COM1 communication baud rate setting,

occupies a double word (32-bit unsigned number) to

SRW10200
indicate: value range: 110~187500. power down to save,

restart to take effect.

SRW10202;COM1 communication data bit, occupies one

SRW10202 word (16-bit unsigned number) to indicate: 8 - 8 data bits, 7

- 7 data bits, power down to save, restart to take effect.

SRW10203;COM1 communication stop bit, occupies a word

SRW10203 (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 1 - 1 stop bit, 2 - 2 stop

bits, power down save, restart effective.

477 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW10204;COM1 communication parity bit, occupies one

word (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 0 - no parity, 1 -

SRW10204
odd parity, 2 - even parity, power down save, restart

effective.

SRW10205;COM1 communication mode, occupies a word

SRW10205 (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 0-232,1-485-4w,2-485-

2w, power down save, restart effective.

SRW10210~225;COM1 connected devices by station number

shield communication, occupy 16 words, each word 16 bits,

corresponding to the station number 0 ~ 255. For example,

SRW10211 Bit3 set to 1 represents the serial port connected

SRW10210
to the station number 19 of the device shield, no longer

communicate. The relevant component data is no longer

refreshed. The configuration is saved at power-down and

takes effect immediately.

Allow/prohibit COM1 auto-mask communication: SRW10230;

occupies a word (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 10 and

SRW10230 above - allows automatic mask communication by station

number in case of communication failure; 0 to 9 - prohibits

auto-masking.

478 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
The station number to be automatically blocked is viewed via

SRW800~SRW815. The retry period after auto-masking is set

via SRW10231.

COM1 auto-mask retry cycle: SRW10231; Sets the cycle time,

in seconds, for the probe test after entering the auto-mask

state. Occupies a word (16-bit unsigned number) to indicate

that the default value is 0 for 10 seconds and takes a

SRW10231

maximum value of 65535 seconds.

This register is valid when SRW10230 is set to allow

automatic masking.

SRW10250~251;COM2 communication baud rate setting,

occupies a double word (32-bit unsigned number) to

SRW10250
indicate: value range: 110~187500. power down to save,

restart to take effect.

SRW10252;COM2 communication data bit, occupies one

SRW10252 word (16-bit unsigned number) to indicate: 8 - 8 data bits, 7

- 7 data bits, power down to save, restart to take effect.

SRW10253;COM2 communication stop bit, occupies a word

SRW10253 (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 1 - 1 stop bit, 2 - 2 stop

bits, power down save, restart effective.

SRW10254;COM2 communication parity bit, occupies one

SRW10254
word (16 unsigned digits) and indicates: 0 - no parity, 1 -

479 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
odd parity, 2 - even parity, power down save, restart

effective.

SRW10255;COM2 communication mode, occupies a word

SRW10255 (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 0-232,1-485-4w,2-485-

2w, power down save, restart effective.

SRW10260~275; COM2 connected devices by station

number shield communication, occupy 16 words, each word

16 bits, corresponding to the station number 0 ~ 255. For

example, SRW10251 Bit3 set to 1 means that the serial port

SRW10260
connected to the station number 19 of the device shield, no

longer communicate. The relevant component data is no

longer refreshed. The configuration is saved at power-down

and takes effect immediately.

Allow/Prohibit COM2 auto-mask communication: SRW10280;

occupies a word (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 10 and

above - allows automatic mask communication by station

number in case of communication failure; 0 to 9 - prohibits

SRW10280
auto-mask.

The station number to be automatically blocked is viewed via

SRW820~SRW835. The retry period after auto-masking is set

via SRW10281.

480 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
COM2 auto-mask retry cycle: SRW10281; Sets the cycle time,

in seconds, for communication probing after entering the

auto-mask state. Occupies a word (16-bit unsigned number)

to indicate that the default value is 0 for 10 seconds and

SRW10281

takes a maximum value of 65535 seconds.

This register is valid when SRW10280 is set to allow auto-

masking.

SRW10300~301;COM1 communication baud rate setting,

occupies a double word (32-bit unsigned number) to

SRW10300
indicate: take the value range: 110~187500. power down to

save, restart to take effect.

SRW10302;COM3 communication data bit, occupies a word

SRW10302 (16-bit unsigned number) to indicate: 8 - 8 data bits, 7 - 7

data bits, power down to save, restart to take effect.

SRW10303;COM3 communication stop bit, occupies a word

SRW10303 (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 1 - 1 stop bit, 2 - 2 stop

bits, power down save, restart effective.

SRW10304;COM3 communication parity bit, occupies one

word (16 unsigned digits) and indicates: 0 - no parity, 1 -

SRW10304
odd parity, 2 - even parity, power down save, restart

effective.

481 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW10305;COM3 communication mode, occupies a word

SRW10305 (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 0-232,1-485-4w,2-485-

2w, power down save, restart effective.

SRW10310~325; COM3 connected devices by station

number shield communication, occupy 16 words, each word

16 bits, corresponding to the station number 0 ~ 255. For

example, SRW10311 Bit3 set to 1 represents the serial port

SRW10310
connected to the station number 19 of the device shield, no

longer communicate. The relevant component data is no

longer refreshed. The configuration is saved at power-down

and takes effect immediately.

Allow/prohibit COM3 auto-mask communication: SRW10330;

occupies a word (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 10 and

above - allow auto-mask communication by station number

in case of communication failure; 0 to 9 - prohibit auto-

SRW10330
mask.

The station number to be automatically blocked is viewed via

SRW840~SRW855. The retry period after auto-masking is set

via SRW10331.

COM3 auto-mask retry cycle: SRW10331; Sets the cycle time

SRW10331 in seconds for communication probing after entering the

auto-mask state. Occupies a word (16-bit unsigned number)

482 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
to indicate that the default value is 0 for 10 seconds and

takes a maximum value of 65535 seconds.

This register is valid when SRW10330 is set to allow auto-

masking.

SRW10350~351;COM4 communication baud rate setting,

occupies a double word (32-bit unsigned number) to

SRW10350
indicate: value range: 110~187500. power down to save,

restart to take effect.

SRW10352;COM4 communication data bit, occupies a word

SRW10352 (16-bit unsigned number) to indicate: 8 - 8 data bits, 7 - 7

data bits, power down save, restart effective.

SRW10353;COM4 communication stop bit, occupies one

SRW10353 word (16-bit unsigned number) and indicates: 1 - 1 stop bit,

2 - 2 stop bits, power down save, restart effective.

SRW10354;COM4 communication parity bit, occupies one

word (16 unsigned digits) and indicates: 0 - no parity, 1 -

SRW10354
odd parity, 2 - even parity, power down save, restart

effective.

SRW10355;COM4 communication mode, occupies a word

SRW10355 (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 0-232,1-485-4w,2-485-

2w, power down save, restart effective.

483 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW10360~375;COM4 connected devices by station number

shield communication, occupy 16 words, each word 16 bits,

corresponding to the station number 0 ~ 255. For example,

SRW10361 Bit3 set to 1 represents the serial port connected

SRW10360
to the station number 19 of the device shield, no longer

communicate. The relevant component data is no longer

refreshed. The configuration is saved at power down and

takes effect immediately.

Allow/prohibit COM4 auto-mask communication: SRW10380;

occupies a word (16-bit unsigned number) indicating: 10 and

above - allows automatic mask communication by station

number in case of communication failure; 0 to 9 - prohibits

SRW10380
auto-masking.

The station number to be automatically blocked is viewed

via SRW860~SRW875. The retry period after auto-

masking is set via SRW10381.

COM4 auto-mask retry cycle: SRW10381; Sets the cycle time

in seconds for communication probing after entering the

auto-mask state. Occupies a word (16-bit unsigned number)

SRW10381
to indicate that the default value is 0 for 10 seconds and

takes a maximum value of 65535 seconds.

484 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
This register is valid when SRW10380 is set to allow auto-

masking.

SRW10500~10515; Network PLC communication mask bit,

this mask bit is for IP, if more than one PLC is connected to

the same IP at the same time, the communication of all these

PLCs is blocked.

SRW10500
For example: SRW10500.0 set to 1 to block communication

of the first network PLC corresponding to the IP,

SRW10500.1 set to 1 to block communication of the second

network PLC corresponding to the IP.

Allow/prohibit Ethernet auto-mask communication:

SRW10518; occupies a word (16-bit unsigned number)

indicating: 10 and above - allow auto-mask communication

by IP in case of communication failure; 0 to 9 - prohibit auto-

SRW10518
mask.

The auto-masked Ethernet devices are viewed via

SRW880~SRW895. The retry period after communication is

automatically blocked is set via SRW10519.

Ethernet device communication auto-mask retry period:

SRW10519; Sets the cycle time in seconds for

SRW10519
communication probing after entering the auto-mask state.

It is expressed as a word (16-bit unsigned number) and the

485 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
default value is 0 for 10 seconds, taking a maximum value of

65535 seconds.

This register is valid when SRW10518 is set to allow

automatic masking.

The 15 level passwords for SETUP mode, corresponding to

SRW10520
SRW10110~169, occupy 60 words

SRW10590~10593; remote PLC communication blocking bit,

used to set whether remote PLC communication is blocked

or not, 4 single words up to 63 remote PLCs are blocked,

corresponding to position 1 means blocking this remote PLC.

SRW10590
For example: SRW10590.1 is set to 1 to block the first remote

PLC added, SRW10590.2 is set to 1 to block the second

remote PLC added.

Note: SRW10590.0 is not valid

SRW10600~10601, user account disable bit, used to set

whether the user account is disabled or not, 2 single words

can disable up to 32 previous user accounts, corresponding

SRW10600
bit setting 1 means disable.

For example: SRW10600.0 set to 1 to disable account 1,

SRW10600.1 set to 0 to not disable account 2.

486 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
SRW10610~10641, user login failure count, 32 words in total,

each word indicates the number of failed login attempts for

one account.
SRW10610
For example, SRW10610 means the number of failed login

attempts for account 1, SRW10641 means the number of

failed login attempts for account 32.

If 1, it means that the 4G box cannot use GSM and will be

SRW10700 disconnected if it is found to be using GSM when connected

to the 4G network.

IP address setting for Ethernet 2, power down hold,

SRW10710 SRW10710~13, each WORD indicates an IP segment. Static

read/write, dynamic read only.

Ethernet 2's Subnet Mask setting, Power Down Hold,

SRW10714 SRW10714~17, each WORD represents an IP segment,

read/write when static, read-only when dynamic.

Ethernet 2's Gateway setting, Power down hold,

SRW10718 SRW10718~21, each WORD represents an IP segment,

read/write at static, read-only at dynamic.

DNS1 setting for Ethernet 2, Power down hold,

SRW10722 SRW10722~25, each WORD represents an IP segment,

read/write at static, read-only at dynamic.

487 / 488
LT Studio User Manual
DNS2 setting for Ethernet 2, Power Down Hold, Alternate

SRW10726 DNS, SRW10726~29, each WORD represents an IP segment,

read/write at static, read-only at dynamic.

LAN IP address setting for Ethernet 2, Power down hold,

SRW10730 SRW10730~33, each WORD represents an IP segment. Read

and write available when static.

488 / 488

HMI Panel
No ratings yet
HMI Panel
495 pages
HCTDesigner en
No ratings yet
HCTDesigner en
583 pages
Ltedevma
No ratings yet
Ltedevma
266 pages
Manual Fstudio (Flexem Hmi)
No ratings yet
Manual Fstudio (Flexem Hmi)
584 pages
Operation Manual: Air Leak Tester LS-R902
No ratings yet
Operation Manual: Air Leak Tester LS-R902
154 pages
Rievtech Studio Felhasznaloi Kezikonyv
No ratings yet
Rievtech Studio Felhasznaloi Kezikonyv
596 pages
LT Series User Manual: Digital Electronics Corporation
No ratings yet
LT Series User Manual: Digital Electronics Corporation
133 pages
Color Monitor: Service Manual
100% (1)
Color Monitor: Service Manual
29 pages
User'S Manual: Industrial Monitor Converter Model: GBS-8219
No ratings yet
User'S Manual: Industrial Monitor Converter Model: GBS-8219
6 pages
TFT 7
No ratings yet
TFT 7
27 pages
Manuel Ecran LCD
No ratings yet
Manuel Ecran LCD
31 pages
08 Lights
No ratings yet
08 Lights
46 pages
LG E1940s1-Pnt
No ratings yet
LG E1940s1-Pnt
34 pages
AT090TN10 - Manual
No ratings yet
AT090TN10 - Manual
22 pages
Manual Do Software BrasilTech
No ratings yet
Manual Do Software BrasilTech
595 pages
Manual F 650
100% (2)
Manual F 650
727 pages
Digital Photo Frame TF-108 Service Manual
No ratings yet
Digital Photo Frame TF-108 Service Manual
32 pages
Im Lyn RX001 A01 Enesfr
No ratings yet
Im Lyn RX001 A01 Enesfr
64 pages
F900got Connection 1 of 6
No ratings yet
F900got Connection 1 of 6
102 pages
Flatron M1717
No ratings yet
Flatron M1717
37 pages
LG E2281tr
No ratings yet
LG E2281tr
22 pages
LG E2341v BNT
No ratings yet
LG E2341v BNT
34 pages
TR Ele Ba GB 0008
No ratings yet
TR Ele Ba GB 0008
38 pages
AT065TN14
No ratings yet
AT065TN14
22 pages
Specification Specification Specification Specification: NNO Display Corporation
No ratings yet
Specification Specification Specification Specification: NNO Display Corporation
23 pages
AT070TN92 V.1-Datasheetmn
No ratings yet
AT070TN92 V.1-Datasheetmn
27 pages
Side View Camera E70, E71
No ratings yet
Side View Camera E70, E71
23 pages
Specification: Inno Display Corporation
No ratings yet
Specification: Inno Display Corporation
23 pages
LG E1941s
100% (1)
LG E1941s
37 pages
PCB Change
No ratings yet
PCB Change
8 pages
7 Inch LCD Spec At070tn90
No ratings yet
7 Inch LCD Spec At070tn90
23 pages
TFT024 23atnn-3475855
No ratings yet
TFT024 23atnn-3475855
25 pages
LTM10C209A Toshiba
No ratings yet
LTM10C209A Toshiba
9 pages
Vartech Systems Inc.: Vt190 Diamondvue/Crystalvue Series 19.0
No ratings yet
Vartech Systems Inc.: Vt190 Diamondvue/Crystalvue Series 19.0
25 pages
Manual para Caminadora Landice (L-60 & L8622 SERIES Diagnostic)
No ratings yet
Manual para Caminadora Landice (L-60 & L8622 SERIES Diagnostic)
67 pages
VGG804830-0TSLWM Rev1 Preliminary
No ratings yet
VGG804830-0TSLWM Rev1 Preliminary
36 pages
Specification: Inno Display Corporation
No ratings yet
Specification: Inno Display Corporation
23 pages
G HL980 en
No ratings yet
G HL980 en
8 pages
DT022BTFT v10
No ratings yet
DT022BTFT v10
12 pages
Iiyama 19LJ2 Service Manual
No ratings yet
Iiyama 19LJ2 Service Manual
41 pages
Friends Niga Memes
No ratings yet
Friends Niga Memes
61 pages
LATS CAD2 User's Manual 082715F PDF
No ratings yet
LATS CAD2 User's Manual 082715F PDF
146 pages
Color Monitor: Service Manual
No ratings yet
Color Monitor: Service Manual
35 pages
Manual Do Usuario IHM GT
No ratings yet
Manual Do Usuario IHM GT
0 pages
LCD LTM14C421S PDF
No ratings yet
LCD LTM14C421S PDF
10 pages
Manual LCD Daewoo
No ratings yet
Manual LCD Daewoo
48 pages
S700-At070tn92 LCD PDF
No ratings yet
S700-At070tn92 LCD PDF
23 pages
EK Remote Display Software DLT1004 03 AE 0004
No ratings yet
EK Remote Display Software DLT1004 03 AE 0004
12 pages
LTA149B780F LCD Panel Datasheet
No ratings yet
LTA149B780F LCD Panel Datasheet
8 pages
Service Manual: R-Series LCD Monitor
No ratings yet
Service Manual: R-Series LCD Monitor
31 pages
GVIF Rev.6 English0118
No ratings yet
GVIF Rev.6 English0118
25 pages
Color Monitor: Service Manual
No ratings yet
Color Monitor: Service Manual
34 pages
LED Media Player
No ratings yet
LED Media Player
21 pages
Belt Manual - CUI R0
No ratings yet
Belt Manual - CUI R0
105 pages
Datasheet: Toshiba
No ratings yet
Datasheet: Toshiba
11 pages
20 Hi Reversible Cold Rolling Mill
100% (1)
20 Hi Reversible Cold Rolling Mill
4 pages
LG Flatron L1720B
No ratings yet
LG Flatron L1720B
26 pages
Stacker-Reclaimer Operation Procedures
No ratings yet
Stacker-Reclaimer Operation Procedures
13 pages
1.TM Architecture
No ratings yet
1.TM Architecture
17 pages
48 Modular
No ratings yet
48 Modular
1 page
Labview-Arduino Interfacing For Data Acquisition and Telemetry System
No ratings yet
Labview-Arduino Interfacing For Data Acquisition and Telemetry System
38 pages
MAD Microproject
No ratings yet
MAD Microproject
27 pages
LT-YJ2000 Liquid-Based Cytology Smear Processor IFU
No ratings yet
LT-YJ2000 Liquid-Based Cytology Smear Processor IFU
12 pages
UiPath RPAv1
No ratings yet
UiPath RPAv1
4 pages
Statcon Electronics & Powtech Internship Projects
No ratings yet
Statcon Electronics & Powtech Internship Projects
2 pages
v17 Launch Webnar Wincc Unified v17 Highlight Innvovations
No ratings yet
v17 Launch Webnar Wincc Unified v17 Highlight Innvovations
45 pages
Game Graphics: General Concepts
No ratings yet
Game Graphics: General Concepts
13 pages
iOS Unit Testing and UI Testing Tutorial
No ratings yet
iOS Unit Testing and UI Testing Tutorial
24 pages
VisiLogic Software Manual - HMI Displays
No ratings yet
VisiLogic Software Manual - HMI Displays
50 pages
STG sg2
No ratings yet
STG sg2
162 pages
Veeam One 10 0 Deployment Guide
No ratings yet
Veeam One 10 0 Deployment Guide
238 pages
824 AVEVA PipeStress
No ratings yet
824 AVEVA PipeStress
2 pages
Ui Ux Specialization Brochure
No ratings yet
Ui Ux Specialization Brochure
23 pages
Eaa 21659
No ratings yet
Eaa 21659
1 page
Nielsen S Usability Principles
No ratings yet
Nielsen S Usability Principles
8 pages
PBE Documentation V2.0
No ratings yet
PBE Documentation V2.0
93 pages
Group1 - D1 Related Work 1
No ratings yet
Group1 - D1 Related Work 1
42 pages
No Code Data Science Tools
No ratings yet
No Code Data Science Tools
13 pages
Manual de Uso de La Maquina de Compresión
No ratings yet
Manual de Uso de La Maquina de Compresión
21 pages
Industrial Hmis and Displays: Enhance Visualization For Increased Efficiency
No ratings yet
Industrial Hmis and Displays: Enhance Visualization For Increased Efficiency
3 pages
BI Assignment7
No ratings yet
BI Assignment7
38 pages
Turkay&Adinolf WCES2010
No ratings yet
Turkay&Adinolf WCES2010
6 pages
STEP7 Lite en
No ratings yet
STEP7 Lite en
6 pages
Plowman 2003
No ratings yet
Plowman 2003
16 pages
The MagicBook A Transitional AR Interface
No ratings yet
The MagicBook A Transitional AR Interface
9 pages

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.